Operation Guide: UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 372

UNM2000

Network Convergence
Management System V2.0R4SP6

Operation Guide
Version: B

Code: MN000003316

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

April 2018 二零一⼋年四月


Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.


We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China


Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.


(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be


reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface

Version

Version Description

Initial version, corresponding to the UNM2000 V2.0R4


A
version.
Updated version, corresponding to the UNM2000 V2.
B
0R4SP6 version.

Related Documentation
Document Main Content Phase to Use
UNM2000 Network Product positioning, features, basic
Network
Convergence Management functions, network and application, and
planning
System Product Description technical specification.

UNM2000 Network
Introduces how to install the UNM2000
Convergence Management
Network Convergence Management Service
System Standalone System
System on the Windows operating deployment
Installation and Deployment
system.
Guide (Based on Windows)

UNM2000 Network
Introduces how to install the UNM2000
Convergence Management
Network Convergence Management Service
System Standalone System
System on the SUSE Linux operating deployment
Installation and Deployment
system.
Guide (Based on SUSE Linux)

UNM2000 Network Introduces the operation guidelines of


Network
Convergence Management the UNM2000 Network Convergence
maintenance
System Operation Guide Management System.

Service
UNM2000 Network The meaning and usage constraints of
deployment /
Convergence Management shortcut menu items and buttons in the
network
System GUI Reference menus and windows.
maintenance

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

I
u Commissioning engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u Data communication technology

u Access network technology

Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention
FiberHome UNM2000 Network Convergence Management
UNM2000
System

Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic


Caution
interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

➔ Jump Jumps to another step.

Cascading
→ Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
↔ The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
→ The service signal is unidirectional.
service

II
Operation Safety Rules

The network management computer should be placed away from


direct sunlight, electromagnetic interference, heat source,
humidity and dust, and with at least 8cm distance from other
objects in order to keep good ventilation.

Use UPS power supply to avoid loss of network management


data caused by accidental power failure.

The computer case, UPS power supply and switch (or hub)
should be connected to protection earth ground.

To shut down the network management computer, exit the


operation system normally and then shut off the power supply.

Do not exit the network management system when it is working


normally. Exiting the network management system does not
interrupt traffic in the network, but precludes centralized control of
the networked equipment.

The network management computer cannot be used for purposes


other than network management. Use of unidentified memory
devices should be prohibited so as to avoid computer viruses.

Do not delete any file in the network management system


randomly or copy any irrelevant file into the network management
computer.

Do not visit Internet via the network management computer.


Doing so may increase data flow in the net card and hence affects
normal network management data transmission or results in other
accidents.

III
Do not perform service configuration or expansion during service
busy hours via the network management system.

Do not modify the network management computer’s protocol


settings, computer name or LAN settings. Doing so may result in
abnormal operation of network management system.

IV
V
VI
Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Operation Safety Rules .........................................................................................III

1 Overview ........................................................................................................1

1.1 Deployment of the UNM2000 in the TMN...........................................2

1.2 Manageable Device Types................................................................2

2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000 ..................................................................4

2.1 Login / Logout...................................................................................5

2.1.1 Downloading Client End......................................................5


2.1.2 Logging into the UNM2000 Client ........................................6
2.1.3 Logging Out of the UNM2000 Client ....................................7

2.2 Views the UNM2000 Version.............................................................7

2.3 GUI Introduction ...............................................................................7

2.3.1 GUI ....................................................................................8


2.3.2 Shortcut Icons.....................................................................8
2.3.3 Common Shortcut Keys .................................................... 11

2.4 Menu Description............................................................................12

2.4.1 System .............................................................................12


2.4.2 View .................................................................................14
2.4.3 Resource..........................................................................15
2.4.4 Configuration ....................................................................17
2.4.5 Alarm................................................................................18
2.4.6 Performance.....................................................................20
2.4.7 Security ............................................................................20
2.4.8 Window ............................................................................21
2.4.9 Help .................................................................................22

2.5 Setting UNM2000 System Parameters ............................................22

2.5.1 Setting the Display of the Browse Tree ..............................22


2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode ......................................................23
2.5.3 Setting the Topology Display .............................................24
2.5.4 Setting Ping Parameters ...................................................25
2.5.5 Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server ...............................26
2.5.6 Setting the Font ................................................................27
2.5.7 Setting the Default Opening Page for NE Manager ............27
2.5.8 Setting the Personalization Switch ....................................28
2.5.9 Setting the GUI Display.....................................................29
2.5.10 Setting the NE Manager....................................................29

2.6 Setting the XFTP Server .................................................................30

2.7 Setting the Default Workspace ........................................................32

2.8 Basic Operations of the UNM2000 ..................................................33

2.8.1 Updating the License ........................................................33


2.8.2 Modifying the User Password............................................34
2.8.3 Locking the Terminal .........................................................35
2.8.4 Logging Out Users............................................................35
2.8.5 Viewing the Message Platform ..........................................36
2.8.6 Managing the Toolbar .......................................................36
2.8.7 Customizing Views ...........................................................38

3 Security Management ...................................................................................39

3.1 User Security Concepts ..................................................................40

3.2 User Security Policy Management...................................................43

3.2.1 Setting the User Login Mode .............................................43


3.2.2 Setting the Access Control List..........................................44
3.2.3 Setting the Account Policy.................................................45
3.2.4 Setting the Password Policy..............................................46

3.3 Managing UNM2000 Users .............................................................47

3.3.1 Operation Set Management ..............................................47


3.3.2 Object Set Management ...................................................50
3.3.3 Managing User Groups .....................................................53
3.3.4 Managing Users ...............................................................58

3.4 Managing User Sessions ................................................................64

3.4.1 Monitoring the User Session .............................................64


3.4.2 Logging Out Users............................................................66
3.4.3 Sending Messages to Online Users...................................67
3.4.4 Monitoring User Activities..................................................68
3.5 Authorization and Domain Division..................................................69

4 Configuration Management ...........................................................................72

4.1 NE Communication Route Management..........................................73

4.1.1 NE Management Program.................................................73


4.1.2 Partition Policy Management.............................................77

4.2 SNMP Parameter Template.............................................................78

4.2.1 Creating and Using the SNMP Parameter Template...........78


4.2.2 Modifying / Deleting an SNMP Parameter Template...........79

4.3 ONU Capability Set Template..........................................................80

4.3.1 Adding an ONU Capability Set Template ...........................80


4.3.2 Modifying an ONU Capability Set Template .......................81

4.4 Managing Global Templates............................................................82

4.4.1 Viewing the Global Template .............................................82


4.4.2 Adding a Global Template .................................................83
4.4.3 Modifying a Global Template .............................................84
4.4.4 Binding / Unbinding a Global Template ..............................85
4.4.5 Deleting a Global Template ...............................................86

4.5 Managing Global Configurations .....................................................87

4.5.1 Viewing Global Configurations ..........................................87


4.5.2 Adding the Global Configuration........................................88
4.5.3 Modifying the Global Configuration....................................88
4.5.4 Issuing the Global Configuration to Device ........................89
4.5.5 Deleting a Global Configuration Template..........................90

4.6 Tracing Signaling ............................................................................91

4.7 Configuration Synchronization ........................................................92

4.8 Network Access Management.........................................................93

4.9 Pinging NEs....................................................................................95

4.10 Telnet NE........................................................................................95

4.11 The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server..................................96

4.12 Migrating the PON Configuration.....................................................97

5 Topology Management..................................................................................98

5.1 Topology Creation Flow...................................................................99


5.2 Creating a Global Logical Domain .................................................100

5.3 Creating NEs ................................................................................101

5.3.1 Create Access NE ..........................................................101


5.3.2 Automatic Discovery of NEs............................................102

5.4 Adding Cards................................................................................105

5.4.1 Adding Cards Automatically ............................................105


5.4.2 Adding Cards Manually ...................................................106

5.5 Creating a Link .............................................................................107

5.6 Editing an NE................................................................................108

5.6.1 Setting NE Attributes.......................................................108


5.6.2 Editing Icons...................................................................109
5.6.3 Setting the Displayed Content of the Icon ........................ 110
5.6.4 Tagging the NE ............................................................... 110
5.6.5 Querying a Label ............................................................ 110
5.6.6 Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner .............................. 111

5.7 Editing a Fiber Connection ............................................................ 113

5.7.1 Modifying the Connection Line Properties........................ 113


5.7.2 Setting the Display Mode of the Connection Line ............. 113

5.8 Browsing the Topology View ......................................................... 114

5.8.1 Checking the Physical Topology View ............................. 114


5.8.2 Viewing the Sub-topology View ....................................... 115
5.8.3 Viewing the Thumbnail.................................................... 117
5.8.4 Searching Objects .......................................................... 117

5.9 Deleting the Topology ................................................................... 119

5.9.1 Deleting the Global Logical Domain................................. 119


5.9.2 Delete the NE ................................................................. 119
5.9.3 Deleting the Card............................................................120

6 Managing Access NEs................................................................................121

6.1 NE Manager GUI ..........................................................................122

6.2 Configuring the Local Service........................................................123

6.3 ONU Query Management .............................................................124

6.3.1 Querying ONUs ..............................................................124


6.3.2 Viewing the ONU List ......................................................125
6.3.3 ONU Query Example ......................................................128

6.4 Authorizing ONUs .........................................................................129

6.4.1 Configuring the ONU Whitelist.........................................129


6.4.2 Managing ONU Authentication Modes.............................130
6.4.3 Managing PON Port Authentication Modes......................132
6.4.4 Replacing the ONU Logical Identifier ...............................133
6.4.5 Viewing the Authorized ONU Information.........................133

6.5 ONU Registration Management ....................................................134

6.5.1 ONU RMS Error Information Query .................................135


6.5.2 Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs .....135

6.6 Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port ............................................135

6.6.1 Viewing Rule Tasks.........................................................136


6.6.2 Creating a Rule Task.......................................................136
6.6.3 Executing Rule Tasks......................................................137

6.7 Authorizing Cards .........................................................................137

6.8 Synchronizing ONUs Manually......................................................138

6.9 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs ......................................................139

6.10 Authorizing ONUs Manually ..........................................................139

6.11 OTDR Link Management ..............................................................140

6.12 System Maintenance ....................................................................142

6.13 Upgrading Cards ..........................................................................142

6.13.1 System Software Upgrade Task ......................................143


6.13.2 Tasks of Upgrading ONUs in a Batch Manner ..................145
6.13.3 Tasks of Upgrading System Cards in a Batch Manner......147
6.13.4 System Software Upgrade Task ......................................150

6.14 Managing Test Tasks ....................................................................152

6.14.1 Managing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks..152


6.14.2 Managing VOIP PING Tasks ...........................................154

6.15 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks .....................................157

6.15.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks...........................157


6.15.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task.......................158

7 Alarm Management ....................................................................................159

7.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................160


7.2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters ................................................164

7.2.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Rules....................................164


7.2.2 Managing Alarm Filter Rules ...........................................166
7.2.3 Setting the Audible Alarms ..............................................171
7.2.4 Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm...............................172
7.2.5 Setting the Display Modes of New Alarms / Events ..........172
7.2.6 Setting the Alarm Color ...................................................173
7.2.7 Setting Other Items of the Local Alarms...........................174
7.2.8 Setting the Definition of the Alarm History........................175
7.2.9 Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules..............175
7.2.10 Converting Events to Alarms ...........................................177
7.2.11 Customizing Alarms........................................................177

7.3 Managing Alarm / Event Templates ...............................................181

7.3.1 Alarm Template...............................................................181


7.3.2 Event Template...............................................................186

7.4 Synchronizing Alarms ...................................................................188

7.4.1 Synchronizing Alarms Manually ......................................188

7.5 Monitoring Network Alarms ...........................................................189

7.5.1 Viewing current alarms....................................................189


7.5.2 Viewing Alarm History .....................................................192
7.5.3 Viewing Related Alarms ..................................................195
7.5.4 Viewing Alarm Details .....................................................195
7.5.5 View alarm logs. .............................................................197
7.5.6 Viewing the Alarm Log Statistics .....................................199
7.5.7 Viewing Alarm Statistics..................................................201
7.5.8 Querying Reported Events ..............................................204
7.5.9 Viewing Reported Alarms................................................206

7.6 Handling Alarms ...........................................................................207

7.6.1 Confirming Alarms ..........................................................207


7.6.2 Clearing Alarms Manually ...............................................208
7.6.3 Confirming and Clearing Alarms......................................209
7.6.4 Locating Alarms..............................................................209
7.6.5 Shielding Alarms.............................................................210
7.6.6 Modifying Alarm Levels ................................................... 211
7.6.7 Editing Alarm Remarks ................................................... 211
7.6.8 Exporting the Alarm Information ......................................212
7.6.9 Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience ...........................212
7.6.10 Managing Maintenance Experience ................................213

7.7 Customizing Alarms......................................................................214

7.7.1 Custom Alarm Name.......................................................214


7.7.2 Custom Alarm Level........................................................215

7.8 Alarm / Event Remote Notification .................................................217

7.8.1 Setting the Notification Communication Parameters ........217


7.8.2 Setting the Remote Notification Format of the Alarm /
Event..............................................................................217
7.8.3 Setting the Remote Notification Sending Rules of the Alarm /
Event..............................................................................218
7.8.4 Setting the Sending Delay of the Alarm / Event Remote
Notification .....................................................................219
7.8.5 Sending Alarm / Event Remote Notification .....................221

7.9 Managing the Alarm / Event Data ..................................................221

7.9.1 Setting the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving.......................222


7.9.2 Setting the Manual Alarm / Event Saving .........................224

7.10 Alarm Logs ...................................................................................225

7.11 Managing Alarm Frequency Analysis Rules...................................228

8 Performance Management..........................................................................230

8.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................231

8.2 Managing Performance Query Templates......................................232

8.2.1 Viewing Performance Templates .....................................232


8.2.2 Creating a Performance Query Template.........................232
8.2.3 Modifying a Performance Query Template .......................234

8.3 Setting the Performance Collection Time .......................................234

8.4 Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a Batch


Manner.........................................................................................235

8.5 Managing the Card Performance...................................................235

8.5.1 Viewing the Current Performance....................................236


8.5.2 Viewing Performance History ..........................................237
8.5.3 Viewing the Performance Comparison.............................239
8.5.4 Viewing Real-time Performance ......................................240
8.5.5 View Performance History Trend .....................................241

8.6 Managing Performance Collection.................................................242

8.6.1 Managing Performance Indicator Sets.............................242


8.6.2 Managing Performance Threshold Sets...........................244
8.6.3 Managing Performance Collection Tasks.........................247

8.7 Managing Performance Data ........................................................249

8.7.1 Setting the Performance Overflow Saving .......................250


8.7.2 Setting Manual Performance Saving ...............................252
8.7.3 Analysis of PON traffic statistics ......................................253
8.7.4 Enabling / disabling FTP Report ......................................254
8.7.5 Top Ranking Statistics.....................................................256

8.8 Managing Statistics Export Task....................................................257

8.8.1 Export Task of Traffic Analysis.........................................257


8.8.2 Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking................................259
8.8.3 Export Task of 15-minute Performance............................260
8.8.4 Export Task of Equipment Traffic and 15-minute
Performance of Health Degree ........................................261

9 Log Management........................................................................................263

9.1 Log Management Policy................................................................264

9.2 Log Type ......................................................................................265

9.2.1 System Logs...................................................................265


9.2.2 Operation Logs ...............................................................266
9.2.3 Security Logs..................................................................267
9.2.4 Northbound Interface Command Logs .............................268

9.3 Log Statistics ................................................................................270

9.4 Managing System Logs ................................................................272

9.4.1 Managing System Log Template .....................................272


9.4.2 Searching System Logs ..................................................274

9.5 Managing Operation Logs .............................................................275

9.5.1 Managing Operation Log Templates ................................275


9.5.2 Querying Operation Logs ................................................277

9.6 Managing Security Logs................................................................280

9.6.1 Managing Security Log Template ....................................280


9.6.2 Querying Security Logs...................................................282

9.7 Managing Northbound Interface Command Logs...........................284

9.7.1 Managing TL1 Command Log Templates ........................284


9.7.2 Querying TL1 Command Logs ........................................285
9.7.3 Querying the Web Service Command Log Template ........287
9.7.4 Querying the Web Service Command Logs .....................289

9.8 Managing Log Data.......................................................................290

9.8.1 Managing the Log Forwarding Server..............................290


9.8.2 Setting the Log Overflow Saving .....................................293
9.8.3 Setting Manual Log Saving .............................................294

10 Resource Management...............................................................................297

10.1 Managing Resource Statistics Template ........................................299

10.1.1 Viewing Resource Statistical Templates ..........................299


10.1.2 Customizing a Resource Statistical Template ..................301

10.2 Physical Resource Statistics .........................................................302

10.3 Resource Statistics of Other Types................................................303

10.4 Exporting Physical Resource Statistics..........................................304

10.5 Exporting Resource Statistics of Other Types ................................306

10.6 Example of Resource Statistics.....................................................307

10.7 Importing the ODN NSM Information .............................................309

10.8 Querying Multiple ONUs ...............................................................310

10.9 Query Board By Serial Number .....................................................312

10.10 Querying the MDU Phone Number ................................................313

10.11 ONU RMS Error Information Query ...............................................314

10.12 Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs ...................315

10.13 Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner ..........................................316

10.14 Gateway Type Config....................................................................316

10.15 Unauthorized ONU List .................................................................317

10.16 Modify ONU Names by Importing EXCEL......................................318

11 Data Synchronization and Backup...............................................................319

11.1 Managing Data Synchronization Task............................................320


11.1.1 Managing Software / Hardware Version Upgrade Tasks...320
11.1.2 Managing Configuration Upload Tasks ............................320

11.2 Backing Up Data...........................................................................324

11.2.1 Managing Software Backup Tasks...................................324


11.2.2 Managing Configuration Export Tasks .............................326
11.2.3 Managing Card Software Backup Tasks ..........................329
11.2.4 Export Tasks of MAC Address Table................................332

12 Application Scenarios .................................................................................336

12.1 Alarm Management ......................................................................337

12.2 Performance Management............................................................340

12.3 Authorization and Domain Division................................................342

12.4 Guaranteeing Device Configuration...............................................344

Appendix A Abbreviations ..........................................................................346


1 Overview

The following introduces the product positioning and GUI of the UNM2000.

Deployment of the UNM2000 in the TMN

Manageable Device Types

Version: B 1
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

1.1 Deployment of the UNM2000 in the TMN

The TMN provides hierarchical network architecture and standard network


interfaces. It is composed of the business management layer (BML), the network
management layer (NML), and the element management layer (EML). This type of
composition is called the network management architecture of the TMN.

The UNM2000 locates at the NML and EML in the TMN architecture and manages
the devices in the access network, transport network and IP network, as shown in
Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Deployment of the UNM2000 in the TMN

1.2 Manageable Device Types

Table 1-1 lists the devices that can be managed by the UNM2000.

2 Version: B
1 Overview

Table 1-1 Manageable Devices

Type Device Model


OLT AN5116-06B, AN5516-06, AN5116-02, AN5516-04 and AN5516-04B.

u GPON: AN5506-02-D/F, AN5506-04-B2/D/F1/FA/FAT, AN5506-07A/09A/10A


and AN5506-07B/09B/10B.

u XGPON: AN5646T/Q, AN5656T, AN5221-8N/16N/24N and AN5231-


ONU
8N/16N/24N.

u EPON: AN5006-07A/09A/10A and AN5006-07B/09B/10B.

u 10GEPON: AN5200-07A/09A/10A and AN5200-07B/09B/10B.


MSAN AN5006-20, AN5006-30, AN5006-15, AN5006-16, AN5220 and AN5516.

Version: B 3
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

The following introduces the basic operations of the UNM2000, including the
following content:

Login / Logout

Views the UNM2000 Version

GUI Introduction

Menu Description

Setting UNM2000 System Parameters

Setting the XFTP Server

Setting the Default Workspace

Basic Operations of the UNM2000

4 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

2.1 Login / Logout

The following introduces how to log into and log out of the UNM2000 client.

2.1.1 Downloading Client End

The following introduces how to install the UNM2000 client end.

Prerequisite

u You have logged in to the system as an administrator.

u The services of the UNM2000 server are started.

u The communication between the client and server is normal (You can ping far-
end IP address command to check whether the network communication is
normal).

Procedure

1. In the address bar of the browser, enter IP:8080/webstart/ (IP indicates the IP
address of the computer when UNM2000 server resides) to open the GUI
below.

2. Click , and click Save in the dialog box that appears.

3. In the Save as dialog box, click Save to download the client end installation file.

Version: B 5
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2.1.2 Logging into the UNM2000 Client

After logging into the UNM2000 client, you can perform configuration management
on the equipment through the GUI of the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

u You have logged in to the system as an administrator.

u The services of the UNM2000 server are started.

u The communication between the client and server is normal (You can Ping far-
end IP address command to check whether the network communication is
normal).

u The client IP address is included in the access control list (ACL) of the
UNM2000. For details about ACL, see Setting the Access Control List.

u You have been assigned with the valid user account and the password.

u The UNM2000 client is installed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the icon on the desktop.

2. In the Server field of the Log into UNM2000 window, enter an IP address or
select a desired UNM2000 server IP address from the drop-down list.

The default port for logging into the server is 52001. If you want to modify the
port, refer to the following steps and set Server filed.

1) Click , and click Add In the Server IP Management dialog box.

2) In the highlighted row, enter IP Address, Port Number, and Host Name,
and click OK.

3. In the Log into UNM2000 dialog box, enter the valid username and password
and click OK.

6 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Note:

After the UNM2000 is installed, the default login username admin and
password admin are provided. You need to change the password
immediately after logging into the UNM2000 to ensure the network
system security.

2.1.3 Logging Out of the UNM2000 Client

Prerequisite

The UNM2000 client is running normally.

Procedure

1. In the UNM2000 window, select System→Exit or click .

2. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm to Exit from the System.

2.2 Views the UNM2000 Version

You can view the version information of the UNM2000 through the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 client.

Procedure

1. Select Help→About UNM2000.

2. View the UNM2000 version in the displayed window.

2.3 GUI Introduction

Understanding the GUI of the UNM2000 client helps you quickly locate the access
methods of various operations and improves the operation efficiency.

Version: B 7
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2.3.1 GUI

The main GUI of the UNM2000 consists of the object tree pane, toolbar and menu
bar, as shown in Figure 2-1.

(1) Object tree pane (2) Toolbar (3) Menu bar

(4) Alarm statistical panel (5) Display pane (6) Status bar

Figure 2-1 UNM2000 System Main GUI

2.3.2 Shortcut Icons

The following introduces the shortcut icons commonly used in the OTNM2000 GUI.

Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

Table 2-1 describes the default shortcut icons on the toolbar.

8 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-1 Default Shortcut Icons in the Toolbar

Cate-
Symbol Name Description
gory

Com-
Refresh Refreshes the current view.
mon
func-
tional Search Object Searches for and locates a desired object.
area
Alarm Prompt Tone Click the icon to enable / disable the alarm sound
Is On prompt.
Alarm
The alarm sound Click the icon to enable / disable the alarm sound
prompt is turned off prompt.

Current alarm query Views the current alarms.


Alarm
Query Reported
Views the reported events.
Events
Perfor- Performance
Views the performance history.
mance history query

EMS User Opens the NMS User Management tab to


Management manage the users.

Opens the Communication Routing


NE Communication
Others Management tab to manage the NE
Route Management
communication routes.
Opens the Parameter Settings dialog box to set
Parameter Settings
the system parameters.

Opens the Legend pane to view the system


Help Legend
legend.

Dynamically displays the number of critical alarms;


Critical Click this icon to open the Current Alarm - All
Objects - Critical tab and view critical alarms.

Dynamically displays the number of major alarms;


Major Click this icon to open the Current Alarm - All
Alarm Objects - Major tab and view major alarms.
Statis- Dynamically displays the number of minor alarms;
tics Minor Click this icon to open the Current Alarm - All
Objects - Minor tab and view minor alarms.

Dynamically displays the number of warning


alarms; Click this icon to open the Current Alarm-
Note
All Objects - Warning tab and view warning
alarms.

Version: B 9
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 2-1 Default Shortcut Icons in the Toolbar (Continued)

Cate-
Symbol Name Description
gory

Opens the Alarm Statistics dialog box, which


Display Alarm
displays the statistics of all current alarms by
Statistics Window
default.

Other Common Shortcut Icons

Table 2-2 describes other common shortcut icons.

Table 2-2 Other Common Shortcut Icons

Symbol Name Description

Quick Search
Enters a keyword to search the current objects for a
in the Browse
desired one. You can click to set the query conditions.
Tree
Advanced
Search Object
Search

Expand Expands the object tree.

Collapse Collapses the object tree.

Create Custom Creates a custom topology view to display only the


View focused objects.

Lock the View Locks the NE icons in the topology view.

Unlock the
Unlocks the NE icons in the topology view.
View

Create Link Creates the link between two NEs.

Moves the NE icons in the topology view when the view


Click
the unlocked.

Move Moves the topology view.

Bird-eye view Displays the aerial view of the topology.

Zoom In Zooms in the topology view.

Zoom Out Zooms out the topology view.

Zoom to 100% Displays the topology view according to its original size.

10 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-2 Other Common Shortcut Icons (Continued)

Symbol Name Description

- Sets the display size of the topology view.

Save picture Saves the current topology as an image.

Save Saves the topology after the modification.

Displays different topological layers, such as core layer,


Topo Layer
convergence layer and access layer.

Last View Returns to the view or subnet opened just now.

Next View
Browses the view or subnet opened before click .

Parent View Returns to the upper level of the current view.

Select Different
Quickly selects the view or subnet opened before.
View
Scroll
Opens the corresponding window towards the left or right
Documents
when multiple windows are opened.
Left/Right

Show Opened Quickly selects the open a certain window from the list
Documents List when multiple windows are opened.

Maximize Maximizes a certain window and hides the other windows


Window when multiple windows are opened.

Restore
Restores the display of multiple windows.
Window

2.3.3 Common Shortcut Keys

Table 2-3 describes the common shortcut keys in the UNM2000.

Table 2-3 Common Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Key Description

F1 Opens the Help.

F5 Refreshes the current view.


Alt+Shift+Enter Selects / Cancels the full-screen mode.
Opens the Search Object dialog box to search for NEs, logical
Ctrl+E
domains or cards.

Version: B 11
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 2-3 Common Shortcut Keys (Continued)

Shortcut Key Description

Ctrl+M Views the current alarms.


Ctrl+H Vies the alarm history.

Ctrl+P Views the performance history.

Opens the Global Template Management tab to manage global


Ctrl+G
templates and configurations.

Alt+S Opens the System main menu.

Alt+V Opens the View main menu.

Alt+E Opens the Resource main menu.

Alt+G Opens the Configure main menu.

Alt+A Opens the Alarm main menu.

Alt+P Opens the Performance main menu.

Alt+U Opens the Security main menu.

Alt+W Opens the Window main menu.

Alt+H Opens the Help main menu.

Ctrl+W Closes the current window.


Shift+Escape Maximizes / restores the current window.

Alt+Shift+D Opens the tab in the current or new window.

Ctrl+Shift+W Closes all tabs except the Main Topology tab.

2.4 Menu Description

The following introduces all menus in the UNM2000 client through which you can
quickly access various operations.

2.4.1 System

Table 2-4 describes the submenus under the System main menu.

Table 2-4 Submenus under the System Main Menu

Item Description

When the overflow save task of historical data is set, the


Overflow UNM2000 will automatically save the EMS log history data,
Save Data
Saving device alarm data and performance data according to the
conditions set in the task.

12 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-4 Submenus under the System Main Menu (Continued)

Item Description

Save Saves the EMS log data, device alarm data and performance
Manually data manually.

Configura- Sets the data backup attributes to complete the device software
tion Backup backup task and configuration data backup task.

Creates the upgrade task to implement upgrade of the OLT


Upgrade
system cards, service cards, TDM cards, voice cards, OLT
Task
firmware and ONU software and firmware in a batch manner.
Implements the synchronization of the data on the device and in
Data the UNM2000. The data synchronization tasks include the
Policy Task
Synchroni- software / hardware version update tasks, configuration
Manage-
zation uploading tasks, NE automatic discovery and ONU port enabling
ment
rule tasks.
The test task includes the POTS port external / internal line task,
Test Task
VoIP pinging test task and HCU discharge test task.

Statistics Creates the statistics exporting task to export the performance


Export Task data such as traffic data to the FTP server.
sets up the configuration script task to download the Telnet
Preset Task
commands in a batch manner automatically.

Indicates an Web-based application program that provides EMS


service process management, resource management, history
Network Management Tool
data management, log management and parameter settings, and
configuration import and export functions.

Local Indicates the interface settings, parameter settings, switch


Settings settings and other settings of the UNM2000 client.

User
Sets the user login mode, access control list, account policy and
Security
password policy of the UNM2000.
Strategy

Sets the alarm parameters, including the local setting and the
server setting.
u Local settings: Sets the alarm sound, alarm color and
Parameter Alarm
processing mode of reported new alarms.
Settings Settings
u Server settings: Sets the alarm automatic confirmation rules,
remote alarm notification and automatic synchronization
mode.
Performance Sets the 24-hour performance collection time of the server and
Settings performance collection range of the ONU.

Service
Configura- Sets the global XFTP server and exported file.
tion

Version: B 13
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 2-4 Submenus under the System Main Menu (Continued)

Item Description

License
Sets the license expiration prompt.
Setting

Default Work Section Sets the UNM2000 workspace directory for storing the temporary
Settings resource files needed by the system.

Lock the Terminal Locks the UNM2000 client manually.

Modify Password Modifies the password of the current user.

Logs out of the current UNM2000 client and returns to the user
Logout
login GUI.

Exiting the System Exits and closes the UNM2000 client.

2.4.2 View

Table 2-5 describes the submenus under the View main menu.

Table 2-5 Submenus under the View Main Menu

Item Description

Displays the IP
Sets whether to display the NE IP address and type next to
address and
the NE icon in the network topology.
type of the NE.
Topo
Sets a picture as the background image of the current
Display Picture Mode
topology.

Sets the map of the local city as the background image of the
Map Mode
current topology.

Opens the Message Platform window at the bottom of the


Message Platform main topology, in which you can understand the system
information.
Sets whether to display

Alarm Statistics on the


toolbar of the main topology, so as to view the UNM2000 and
Toolbar
NE alarms.

Common
Sets whether to display on the toolbar of the
Function Area
main GUI.

14 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-5 Submenus under the View Main Menu (Continued)

Item Description

Alarm Sets whether to display on the toolbar of the


main GUI.

Performance
Sets whether to display on the toolbar of the main GUI.

Others Sets whether to display on the toolbar of the


main GUI.

Sets on the toolbar of the main GUI. Click this icon and
Legend
the Legend window appears on the right, displaying the
description of the icons.

Small Toolbar
Sets the display size of shortcut icons.
Icons
Restores the default shortcut keys on the toolbar of the main
Reset Toolbars
topology.

Adds the commonly used tools onto the toolbar by


Customize
customizing the toolbar.

Zoom In Zooms in the topology view.

Zoom Out Zooms out the topology view.


Zoom
Actual Size Displays the topology view according to its actual size.

Optimum Size Displays the topology view according to the window size.

Full Screen Displays the EMS system in full screen.

Refresh Refreshes the current view.

2.4.3 Resource

Table 2-6 describes the submenus under the Resource main menu.

Version: B 15
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 2-6 Submenus under the Resource Main Menu

Item Description

Opens the NE manager, in which you can perform operations


Open NE Manager based on NEs as well as configure, manage and maintain
NEs, cards or ports separately.

Detects the card physical configurations of the devices in the


Detect Physical Configuration network and automatically synchronizes the card physical
configurations of the devices to the UNM2000.

Detects the devices connected to the UNM2000


Auto NE Discovery automatically, creates NE and configures NE data in the
topology.

Creates a logical domain for managing NEs. The logical


Create Logical Domain
domain is a set of NEs.
Create Access
Create Access NE
NE
Create NE
Create Other
Create Other NEs
NEs
Modify NE Names in a Batch Modifies or replaces the names of logical domains, NEs or
Manner ONUs in a batch manner.
Modify ONU Names by Modifies ONU names in a batch manner by importing EXCEL
Importing EXCEL information.
Imports the ODN relevant information into the UNM2000,
including the IP address and name of the OLT connected to
Import ODN NSM Information
the ODN, PON port of the ONU, ONU name, optical splitter
name, port, etc.

Delete NE Deletes all the data of the selected network or subnet.


Fiber Channel Management Manages the fiber channels.

Searches for the object by the specified search conditions, for


Search Object
example, NE, logical domain or card.

Query ONU Searches for the ONU by the specified search conditions.

Searches for the ONU by the specified search conditions in a


Batch Query ONU
batch manner.
Query MDU Phone Number Searches for the MDU relevant information by phone number.

Query Board By Serial


Queries detailed information of cards through serial number.
Number
ONU RMS Error Information Queries error information of the ONU RMS to know about the
Query fault reason.

16 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-6 Submenus under the Resource Main Menu (Continued)

Item Description

Through the ONU network interception records, you can


Querying the ONU Network check whether multiple ONUs apply access to the network for
Access Interception Logs the same MAC address. This can help the maintenance
engineers query the network access failure.

Marks the NE with a specified label so that it can be quickly


Mark the NE As
queried.

Label Query Queries an NE according to the customized NE label.

GIS Batch Import Imports the NE GIS information in a batch manner.

Gateway Type Config Sets the NM type information.

The resource statistics include physical resource statistics,


statistics of other types, physical resource statistics export
and statistics export of other types.
u Physical Resource Statistics: Gathers statistics of NEs,
cards, ports and ONUs according to the preset statistical
template.
u Other Type Statistics: Gathers statistics of ONU users,
local end VLANs, NE MGC services and device types
according to the preset statistical template.
u Physical Resource Statistics Export: Exports the
Resource Statistics statistics of physical data. If you export statistics directory
through the GUI, you can save them as a TXT, EXCEL,
CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file. If you export them through
the XFTP server, you can only save them as an XML or
CSV file.
u Statistics Export of Other Types: Exports the statistics of
user information or service information. If you export
statistics directory through the GUI, you can save them
as a TXT, EXCEL, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file. If you
export them through the XFTP server, you can only save
them as an XML or CSV file.
Unauthorized ONU List Queries an unauthorized ONU list in a specific object.

2.4.4 Configuration

The submenus under the Configure main menu are described in Table 2-7.

Version: B 17
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 2-7 Submenus under the Configuration Main Menu

Item Description

The global template management includes the global templates and the
global configurations.
u Global template: Configures the unified template for the NEs of the
same model in the administrative domain, such as line template,
Global Template
QoS template, port template, service template and bandwidth
Management
template.
u Global configuration: Configures the non-template information for
the NEs of the same domain in the administrative domain in a
centralized manner.
SNMP Parameter Configures and manages the SNMP parameter templates used for
Template communication between the UNM2000 server and NEs.
NE Communication
Creates management programs so as to manage NEs based on
Route
partitions and manage the pre-configured NEs.
Management

Network Access Queries, sets and delivers the interconnection status and network access
Status status of the system or the resource management system of the line
Management card.
Traces the signaling frame of the communication between the current
Tracing Signaling IAD and the voice communication card, so as to find the communication
faults in a timely manner.

Compares whether the configuration data in the UNM2000 and the data
Configuration
on the equipment are the same and synchronizes the configuration data
Synchronization
in the UNM2000 with the data on the device.
Migrating the PON
Migrates the PON configuration.
Configuration

2.4.5 Alarm

Table 2-8 describes the submenus under the Alarm main menu.

Table 2-8 Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu

Item Description

Sets the query conditions to view the current alarms of the entire
Current Alarm
network or a specified object.

Sets the query conditions to view the alarm history of the entire
Alarm History
network or a specified object.

18 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-8 Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu (Continued)

Item Description

Sets the alarm reporting conditions to view the reported alarms of


View Report Alarm
the entire network or a specified object.

Sets the event reporting conditions to view the reported events of


Query Reported Event
the entire network or a specified object.

Alarm Report Sets the alarm reporting rules according to the requirements for
Settings network maintenance.
Event to Alarm Sets specified events for alarm reporting according to the
Settings requirements for network maintenance.

Shield Rule of Sets filter rules for the alarms not reported to the northbound
North interface according to the requirements for network maintenance.

Alarm Shield
Sets filter rules to filter the alarms not focused according to the
Rule
requirements for network maintenance.
Management

Alarm Flashing Sets effective time of filtering rules to filter the alarms not focused
Set-
Shield Rule in real time according to the requirements for network
tings
Management maintenance.
Alarm Sets the alarm frequency analysis rule so that the EMS will
Frequency process alarms according to the rule settings once the specified
Analysis Rule object meets the preset conditions.

Alarm Sets the information of the alarm receiver to make sure important
Notification alarms are notified to the device maintainer in a timely manner.

Custom Alarm
Customize the alarm levels.
Level
Alarm
Maintenance Enters the experience information of alarm maintenance.
Experience

Quickly completes the settings of alarm browsing and alarm


Alarm Query Template
attributes to simplify the user setting operations.

Sets the event reporting rules according to the requirements for


Event Query Template
network maintenance.
Sets alarm filtering fields to automatically filter all the reported
Shield Project Alarms alarms and alarm clearance information during the project
construction.
Custom Alarm Name Customizes alarm names.
Query Alarm
Queries alarms according to the query conditions.
Alarm Log
Log History Alarm Gathers statistics of historical alarms according to the specified
Log Statistics statistical conditions.

Version: B 19
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 2-8 Submenus under the Alarm Main Menu (Continued)

Item Description

Current Alarm Gathers statistics of current alarms according to the specified


Log Statistics statistical conditions.

2.4.6 Performance

The submenus under the Performance main menu are described in Table 2-9.

Table 2-9 Submenus under the Performance Main Menu

Item Description

Sets the query conditions to view the performance history of the


Performance History
entire network or a specified object.

Sets the statistical template of performance history to view the


View Performance performance history charts so as to understand the performance
History Trend data change trend of the specified object and the running status of
the network.
Collection Task Sets the indicator, threshold, task and time for the performance
Management connection.
PAS Collection Task Sets the indicator, threshold, task and time for the performance
Management connection of the transport domain.

Performance
Queries or configures the performance classification switch for
Classification Switch
NEs in a batch manner.
Config

Performance Query
Save the common performance query conditions as a template.
Template

Pm FTP Switch
Configure the FTP performance reporting switch.
Management

Analysis of PON traffic


Query the traffic analysis data of the PON port.
statistics
Query the traffic ranking of the PON port and the health ranking of
Top rank statistics
the device.

2.4.7 Security

Table 2-10 describes the submenus under the Security main menu.

20 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 2-10 Submenus under the Security Main Menu

Item Description

Manages the UNM2000 users, user groups and operation sets,


EMS User Management
including the security attribute settings and authority allocation.

Manages the device users, including adding, deleting, modifying,


Device User Management
enabling and disabling the device users.

Sets the operations of monitoring user sessions and user activity


Monitor User Session
information.
Search the System Logs Sets the filter conditions to query the system logs.

Query Operation Logs Sets the filter conditions to query the operations logs.

Query Security Logs Sets the filter conditions to query the security logs.

Query Device Syslog Sets the filter conditions to query the device operations logs.

Query Northbound
Sets the filter conditions to query the northbound command logs.
Interface Command Logs

Statistical System Logs Sets the filter conditions to gather statistics of system logs.

Statistical Operation Logs Sets the filter conditions to gather statistics of operation logs.

Statistical Security Logs Sets the filter conditions to gather statistics of security logs.

Statistical Northbound Sets the filter conditions to gather statistics of northbound


Interface Command Logs command logs.

Log Forwarding Server


Forwards the UNM2000 logs to other servers.
Management

2.4.8 Window

Table 2-11 describes the submenus under the Window main menu.

Table 2-11 Submenus under the Window Main Menu

Item Description

Close Window Closes all the opened windows except the main topology.

Maximize Window Maximizes the current window.


Undock Window Cascades all the opened windows.

Close All Windows Closes all the opened windows except the main topology.

Closes all the opened windows except the main topology


Close Other Windows
and current window.
Window Displays the description of each window.

Version: B 21
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2.4.9 Help

Table 2-12 describes submenus under the Help main menu.

Table 2-12 Submenus under the Help Main Menu

Item Description

Help Displays on-line help of the UNM2000.

Legend Opens the Legend pane to view the system legend.

Displays the UNM2000 license information, including server ID and


License Management
operations for updating the license.

Displays the UNM2000 version, registration information and installed


About UNM2000
components.

2.5 Setting UNM2000 System Parameters

The UNM2000 system parameters include the browse tree display mode, time
mode, topology display, ping parameters, Telnet proxy server, GUI display, font
settings, personalized switch settings, default page opening settings and NE
manager settings. The following introduces how to set and use these parameters.

2.5.1 Setting the Display of the Browse Tree

The Viewing Tree Setting dialog box is used for setting the display of the main
topology. You can set the icon size, border pixels, height as well as the space
between the border and the text.

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Viewing Tree Setting in the left


pane to open the Viewing Tree Setting dialog box.

22 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

3. Set various parameters as required. Users can preview the display style via the
instance text during setting.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will take effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

2.5.2 Setting the Time Mode

Set the time mode of the client end. The UNM2000 displays the time in the
configured time mode (UTC or local time).

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Note:

It is recommended that the client time should be consistent with that of


the server to avoid reporting errors of data at both ends.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Other Setting→Time Mode in the left pane to open


the Time Mode dialog box.

3. Set the time display mode of the client end as required. Then click Apply to
apply the settings.

Version: B 23
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2.5.3 Setting the Topology Display

The UNM2000 allows you to set the background image display of the main topology.
You can set the display style as required.

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Topology Setting in the left pane


to open the Topology Setting dialog box.

3. Set the background display mode of the main topology.

4 Select Image Mode and then click Apply→OK to set the background of
the main topology to image mode.

In the image mode, right-click in the blank area of the physical topology
view and select Set Background Image or Use the Default Background
Image from the shortcut menu to set the background image of the physical
topology view.

4 Select Map Mode to set the background of the main topology to map
mode.

a) In the gis map url text box, enter the address of the network map or
the map package in the local EMS.

b) Click Apply→OK.

24 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Caution:

The address entered in the dis map url text box should meet the
following requirements:
u For the network map, the address must be the URL of the GIS online
map database.

u For the map package in the local EMS, the address should be that of
the map folder downloaded to the local EMS.

Other Operations

u Expand / collapse all logical domains.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Expand
All Logic Domains or Collapse All Logic Domains.

u Hide nodes.

Right-click the NE in the physical topology view and select Hidden Node from
the shortcut menu. The NE will not appear in the physical topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Manage
the Hidden Nodes to open the Hide Node Management dialog box. Then
select the nodes to be displayed and click OK. The corresponding nodes are
displayed in the physical topology view.

u Lock, move, zoom in or zoom out the physical topology view via the shortcut
icons at the top of the main topology.

2.5.4 Setting Ping Parameters

You can set the UNM2000 to continuously ping the NE or transfer the ping via the
server so as to confirm whether the communication between the UNM2000 and the
NE is normal.

Version: B 25
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Background Information

u When Consecutive Ping is not selected, the EMS will execute the Ping
command at most four times.

u When the client cannot ping the NEs, you can select Forward Ping Packet via
the Server to determine whether the communication between the EMS and
NEs are normal.

u After the Ping parameters of the client are set, the settings take effect
immediately.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Para Setting→Ping Parameter Config in the left


pane to open the Ping Parameter Config dialog box.

3. Set the Ping parameters as required and click Applyto validate the settings.

4 If Consecutive Ping is selected, the EMS will send the Ping commands
consecutively to the object after you right-click an object and select Ping.

4 If Forward Ping Packet via the Server is selected, the Ping commands
will be forwarded by the server.

2.5.5 Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server

After setting the parameters related to the Telnet / SSH proxy server, you can use
the proxy server to access the device.

Background Information

The settings of the Telnet Proxy Server take effect immediately.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

26 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Param Setting→Telnet/SSH Proxy Server to open


the dialog box.

3. Select Enable Telnet/SSH Proxy Server, set the information of the proxy
server according to the actual situation and click Apply. The settings will take
effect immediately.

2.5.6 Setting the Font

You can set the font, size and style of the UNM2000 GUI by Font Setting.

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface SettingFont Setting in the left pane to open


the dialog box.

3. Set various parameters as required. You can preview the font during setting.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore the system default font to restore the parameters to the default
values.

2.5.7 Setting the Default Opening Page for NE Manager

You can customize the default opening page of the NE manager as desired.

Version: B 27
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→Default Page Open Setting in the


left pane to open the Default Page Open Setting dialog box.

3. Set the default opening page of the NE manager.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default system configuration.

2.5.8 Setting the Personalization Switch

You can set the personalization switch to top the vendor information in the ONU list.

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local SettingsSwitch SettingsPersonal Style Setting in the left pane to


open the Personal Style Setting dialog box.

3. Select ONU vendor info show setting and click Apply to take effect
immediately.

28 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

2.5.9 Setting the GUI Display

You can set the maximum number of tables rows displayed on the GUI, the display
mode of the alarm name, performance name as well as whether to lock the GUI
automatically.

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local SettingsInterface SettingDisplay in the left pane to open the dialog
box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

2.5.10 Setting the NE Manager

The UNM2000 client end supports setting the opened NE manager quantity and
supports enabling NE manager closing prompt to facilitate the utilization.

Background Information

This setting will take effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

Version: B 29
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. Select Local SettingsInterface SettingSet up NmFrame Open in the left pane to


open the Set up NmFrame Open dialog box.

3. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

2.6 Setting the XFTP Server

You can set the XFTP server and related parameters to implement the data
transmission between the UNM2000 client and the server end.

30 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Background Information

The XFTP server settings are the foundation for implementing the functions of
multiple modules, including policy task module, data history save module, log
forwarding module and statistical information export module. The functions of the
modules implemented via setting the XFTP server are shown in the following table.

Module
Implemented Function Related Function
Name
Includes the software backup task,
Implements the task customization configuration export task, system software
Policy Task
via the XFTP server. upgrade task, ONU batch upgrade task
and service card batch upgrade.

Includes the NE resource statistics, card


resource statistics, port resource statistics,
ONU resource statistics, ONU port
resource statistics, MDU port resource
statistics, local VLAN statistics, ONU user
Resource Exports the resource statistics
statistics, NE MGC service statistics, ONU
Export onto the preset XFTP server.
MGC service statistics, device type
statistics, PON device capability statistics,
PON traffic statistics, MAC address of the
PON port and MAC address(es) of a
single or networkwide OLTs.

Includes the operation log save, TL1 log


Releases the database space and
save, system log save, alarm history save,
Save Data saves the data onto the XFTP
performance history save and event
server.
overflow save.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→XFTP Server Setting in the left pane to view


the preset XFTP server.

Version: B 31
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Click Add to add a blank row in the window. Then click each field and set the
parameters of the XFTP server.

4. After completing the settings, click Apply. The added XFTP server appears in
the window.

Other Operations

For the XFTP server already set, if it is no longer used or if you want to test it before
use, do as follows:

u Select the XFTP server not needed and click Delete to delete it.

u Select the desired XFTP server and click Test XFTP to test whether the XFTP
server can be connected normally.

2.7 Setting the Default Workspace

When using the UNM2000 for the first time, you need to set up a workspace
directory for storing the temporary resource files required by the system.

32 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Note:
This directory must be readable and writable with a hard disk space
greater than 512M.

Procedure

1. Select System→Default Work Section Settings from the main menu to open
the Default Work Section Settings dialog box.

2. Click Select to select the folder where the workspace locates and then click
Open.

3. Click OK to complete the settings.

2.8 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

The following introduces basic operations of the UNM2000 client for users to quickly
know how to operate the EMS.

2.8.1 Updating the License

The UNM2000 License file is used for controlling the functions and management
capability of the UNM2000. Without the License file, you cannot log into the
UNM2000 client. The following introduces how to update the UNM2000 license.

Version: B 33
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u Log into the UNM2000 as an administrator.

u The UNM2000 License file has been obtained.

Procedure

1. Back up the original License.

Create a backup folder in the D:\unm2000\platform\etc\license directory and


copy the original license file unm2000_license.lic to this folder.

2. Select Help→License Management from the main menu.

3. In the displayed License Information dialog box, click Update the License.

4. In the Open dialog box, select a corresponding license file and click Open.

5. In the license Comparison dialog box, check the control items of the original
and new license files and then click Confirm to Update License.

6. Click OK in the Message alert box.

7. Click Close in the License Information dialog box.

2.8.2 Modifying the User Password

To ensure the access security of the UNM2000, it is recommended to modify your


password regularly.

Procedure

1. Select System→Modify Password from the main menu.

2. In the displayed Modify Password dialog box, enter Old Password, New
Password and Confirm Password.

Note:

The new password must comply with the set password policies. For
setting the password policies, see Setting the Password Policy.

3. Click OK.

34 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

2.8.3 Locking the Terminal

If the UNM2000 client is idle, you can lock the client upon leaving to prevent
unauthorized operations. The operation is only applicable to the user who
performed the operation.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Follow the steps below to lock the client.

4 Lock the terminal manually.

Select System→Lock the Terminal to open the The window is locked


dialog box.

4 Locking the terminal automatically.

Enable the automatic terminal lock according to Setting the GUI Display. If
no operation is performed after a set time period, the terminal will be
locked automatically.

2.8.4 Logging Out Users

Different EMS users have different operation authority. You can log out from the
EMS and then log in as another user to perform different operations.

Procedure

1. Select System→Logout from the main menu.

2. Click OK in the displayed alert box.

3. In the displayed UNM2000 Login dialog box, enter the corresponding


username and password, and click Login.

Version: B 35
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2.8.5 Viewing the Message Platform

You can view the message platform to understand the information prompting the
influence on the UNM2000 running the operation return information.

Procedure

1. Select View→Message Platform from the main menu to open the Message
Platform pane.

2. View the prompts or returned message of the operations in the Message


Platform pane at the lower part of the window.

2.8.6 Managing the Toolbar

You can set the tools to be displayed in the toolbar and the shortcut button of each
tool, so as to improve the operation efficiency.

Procedure

1. Select View→Toolbars from the main menu.

2. In the Toolbar box, click the functional blocks to be displayed in the main
topology GUI.

36 Version: B
2 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

3. The √ symbol will be shown on the right side of the selected functional block.
The selected functional blocks will also be shown in the toolbar in the main
view.

Other Operations

1. Select Customize to open the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

2. Click New Toolbar, enter the new functional block name in the New Toolbar
dialog box, and click OK..

3. Drag the items in the available tool area in or out of the toolbar to add or delete
the corresponding shortcut icon as required.

4. After completing the setting, click Close.

Version: B 37
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

The example below illustrates creating the Topology functional block in the
toolbar, and drag the Create Customized View shortcut icon into the
Topology functional block in the Customize Toolbar dialog box.

2.8.7 Customizing Views

In case of too many devices in the main topology, the focused object is not easy to
locate and view. However, you can create a custom view to only display your
focused objects.

Background Information

u Each user can create up to five custom views.

u Users can only see the custom views created by themselves.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the toolbar of the Current Topology or Current View tab, click .

2. In the Create custom views dialog box that appears, fill in the view name and
the remarks.

3. Select Node Member→Select. In the Select Object dialog box, select the NEs
to be displayed in the custom view, and then click OK.

4. Select Link Member→Select. In the Select Object dialog box, select the NE
links to be displayed in the custom view, and then click OK.

5. Click OK in the Create Custom View dialog box.

6. In the UNM2000 alert box that appears, click Yes to switch to the custom view.

38 Version: B
3 Security Management

The security management is used to prevent unauthorized login to the public


network to guarantee the network data security. The security management includes
the security policy management, user management and authority and domain
division management of the UNM2000.

User Security Concepts

User Security Policy Management

Managing UNM2000 Users

Managing User Sessions

Authorization and Domain Division

Version: B 39
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3.1 User Security Concepts

The security management of the UNM2000 users mainly includes authority


management, password policy, account policy, access user management and user
monitoring. The concepts involved in the security management of the UNM2000
users are described as follows:

Managed Entities

u Object Set: Indicates a set of managed objects. Dividing the managed objects
into object sets, facilitating the allocation of authority for managing NEs.

The object set can be created through the logical domain. It includes the
physical objects and EMS pre-authorized OLTs, with the smallest granularity
being NEs.

u Object Set: Indicates a set of operations. You can divide the client operations
into different operation sets for convenient management of user authority.
Different operations have different influence on the system. You can divide the
operations that may cause the same influence on the system into an operation
set. When being assigned with the authority of an operation set, the user can
perform all the operations included in the operation set.

Note:

Default operation sets are provided in the UNM2000. When the default
operation sets cannot meet the requirements for authority assignment.
You can create operation sets as needed.

u User Group: Indicates a set of UNM2000 users of the same management


authority. The UNM2000 supports creating user groups to manage the users of
the same authority in a same group. The users in a same group have the same
authority and can perform the operations included in the operation set
associated with the user group.

The default user groups of the UNM2000 include the Administrators group, the
security management group, inspector group, the operator group and the
maintainer group.

40 Version: B
3 Security Management

4 Administrators: The Administrators group cannot be created nor deleted.


The Administrators group has the administrative domains of all objects in
the entire network and all the operation authority except the security
management authority. Its administrative domains and operation authority
cannot be modified.

4 Security Admin Group: This group cannot be created nor deleted. The
Security Admin Group has the administrative domains of all objects in the
entire network and the authority related to security management authority.

4 Inspector group: This group has the default authority of Inspector


Operation Sets. The users in this group can only query and gather
statistics, having no authority to perform the creation and configuration
operations.

4 Operator group: This group has the default authority of Operator


Operation Set. Apart from the basic authority of the inspector group, the
users in this group can perform the creation, modification and deletion
operations in the UNM2000, but having no authority related to security
management.

4 Maintainer group: This group has the default authority of Operator


Operation Set. Apart from the authority of the inspector group and the
operator group, the users in this group can perform the configuration
operations that may influence the running of the UNM2000 and the NEs,
such as searching for service path, deleting service configuration, etc.

u User: Indicates the UNM2000 client end users. The username and password of
the user uniquely determines the corresponding UNM2000 operation and
management authority. When a user is added into a user group, the user is
assigned with the operation authority associated with the user group.

4 One user can be added into multiple user groups simultaneously, and
therefore the final authority of the user are the user's original authority
coupled with the authority of the user groups to which the user belongs.
There are two ways to assign authority to users:

¡ Adding a user into a specific user group so that the user has the
authority assigned to the user group.

¡ Bind the user with the object set and the operation set.

Version: B 41
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 The UNM2000 provides a default user named admin, which is the system
administrator. The admin user belongs to the Administrators and
Security Admin Group groups by default. You cannot modify the authority
of admin or add it to other user groups either.

Authorization and Domain Division

When the managed objects and users are of a large scale, the uniform
management of authorization and domain division by a certain type of users will be
both time and effort consuming. Therefore, it is necessary to divide the managed
objects into several sub-domains. Each sub-domain can perform authorization and
domain division management without interfering each other.

The authority and domain division function of the EMS is implemented by dividing
the object sets and operation sets. With the authority division management function,
you can divide the EMS authority into different functional domains, and with the
domain division management function, you can divide NE units into different
network domains. Assigning the UNM2000 users with the authority combination of
different functional domains and network domains effectively controls user
management authority.

Application of the authorization and domain division management: Divide the user
groups into ordinary user group and administrative user group. Creating a user
group is like creating a sub-domain. In this sub-domain, the users are authorized
with the operation authority within this sub-domain and can create the object set,
operation set, user group, users based on such domain authority. They are visible to
other users within the sub-domain, but invisible to users outside the sub-domain.

Note:

The network management system provides an embedded user named


admin, who is authorized with all authority and can manage all object sets,
operation sets, user groups and users.

Account Policy and Password Policy

The UNM2000 user security can be implemented by setting the account policy and
password policy.

42 Version: B
3 Security Management

u Account policy: Defines the minimum length, account login and unlocking
settings of the user account. Using the account policy can enhance the security
of the user account.

u Password policy: Defines the complexity, updating period and length limit of the
password.

3.2 User Security Policy Management

The security policies, such as access control, password and lockout management
and online user monitoring effectively enhance the access security of the UNM2000
and prevent unauthorized operations.

The user security policies are the access control rules defined for managing users.
The security policy planning and configuration should be completed upon initial
installation. You can adjust the security policies according to your management
requirement.

The user security policy management includes the following:

u Setting the User Login Mode

u Setting the Access Control List

u Setting the Account Policy

u Setting the Password Policy

3.2.1 Setting the User Login Mode

The UNM2000 supports the single-user login mode and multi-user login mode.
Typically, the UNM2000 runs in the multi-user mode. When maintaining the
UNM2000 server (for example, adjusting the user group, administrative domain or
operation authority of a user), you can set the UNM2000 to the single-user login
mode to avoid operation interference caused by other users.

Background Information

u Single-user mode: In this mode, only one admin user can log into the UNM2000
via the client end, and all other online users will be forced to exit.

Version: B 43
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Multiple-user mode: In this mode, multiple users are allowed to log in


simultaneously. This mode is used for monitoring the network routinely.

Caution:

When the UNM2000 is switched to the single-user mode, only one admin
user can log into the UNM2000 via the client end, and all other online
users will be forced to exit. To ensure that other users use the UNM2000
normally, switch the UNM2000 to the multi-user login mode after
completing the maintenance in single-user mode.

Prerequisite

Log in as an admin user.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→User Login Mode in the left pane to open the
User Login Mode dialog box.

3. Set the login mode as required. Then click Apply and the settings will be valid.

3.2.2 Setting the Access Control List

By setting the access control list, you can have the UNM2000 users log in to the
client from the specified IP address or network segment to ensure network security.

Background Information

The access control list set by a user is only applicable to the user.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin
Group.

44 Version: B
3 Security Management

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select User Security Strategy→Access Control List to open
the Access Control List dialog box.

3. Click Add to open the Set IP Range dialog box.

4. Set Start Address and End Address and click OK. The added IP range will be
displayed in the access control list.

Note:

Click to switch between IPV4 and IPV6.

5. Click Apply, and the settings will take effect.

3.2.3 Setting the Account Policy

The account policy includes locking / unlocking users, non-logged-in user policy,
and the minimum length of the username. Setting the account policy can ensure the
security of the account and the network.

Prerequisite

You have logged in as a member of the Security Administrator group.

Background Information

u The account policy must be configured upon initial installation of the UNM2000
and can be adjusted accordingly during maintenance.

Version: B 45
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u The new account policy has no effect on the accounts already set.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→Account Policy in the left pane to open the
dialog box.

3. Set the parameters and then click Apply to apply the settings.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

3.2.4 Setting the Password Policy

Setting the complexity of the password and modifying the password regularly can
improve the access security of the UNM2000. The password policy, set by the
security administrator, is applicable to all users.

Prerequisite

You have logged in as a member of the Security Administrator Group.

Background Information

u The password policy must be configured upon initial phase of the site building
and can be adjusted accordingly during maintenance.

u The new password policy has no effect on the passwords already set.

u The password policy includes the complexity, updating period and length limit.

u The new password policy will be applicable to all users of the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

46 Version: B
3 Security Management

2. Select User Security Strategy→Password Policy in the left pane to open the
dialog box.

3. Set the information in Common Policy and Advanced Policy, and then click
Apply. The settings will take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

3.3 Managing UNM2000 Users

The following introduces how to create, modify and delete the UNM2000 users, and
how to assign the authority for the users.

3.3.1 Operation Set Management

The operation set is the set of operations of the same type. Through the operation
set management, users can assign and manage the operations on the equipment
uniformly.

u In the default operation sets provided by the UNM2000, the application


operation complete set and the object operation complete set cannot be
deleted.

u The operation sets include two types: NM application and Network device.

u When a certain user or user group is bound with an operation set, this user or
user group will have the authority of the operations in this set.

u Only the users in the security administrator group and the sub-domain security
administrator group can manage the operation sets.

3.3.1.1 Viewing Operation Sets

The security administrator can view specific operations included in an operation set
to check whether the authority in the operation set meet the requirements.

Version: B 47
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have logged into the OTNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Management
Group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Select Operation Set or click before Operation Set in the left pane. Then
view the existing operation sets in the right pane or the expanded list of
Operation Set in the left pane.

3. Double-click the operation set entry in the right pane to view details in the
Basic Information, Member and Service For tabs of the operation set.

Other Operations

u In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Copy Cell,
Print or Export.

48 Version: B
3 Security Management

u Select a desired operation set in the left pane, modify the corresponding
information in the right pane as needed and click Apply.

Note:

You can only modify the descriptions in the application operation


complete set and the object operation complete set.

3.3.1.2 Creating Operation Groups

The operation set is the set of operations of the same type. Through the operation
set management, users can assign and manage the operations on the equipment
uniformly. You can create operation groups when the existing operation groups
cannot meet your requirements.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Administrator
group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Select one of the following access methods to display the Create Operation
Set dialog box.

No. Access Method


Click NMS User Management in the left pane and click Create Operation Set in the
1
right pane.

Click NMS User Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select
2
Create Operation Set from the shortcut menu.

Select Operation Set in the left pane and click Create Operation Set in the right
3
pane.

Click Operation Set in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select Create
4
Operation Set from the shortcut menu.

Right-click Operation Set in the left pane and select Create Operation Set from the
5
shortcut menu.

Version: B 49
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. In the Create Operation Set dialog box, set the parameters in the Basic
Information and Member tabs.

Note:

Click Copy Members from the Operation Set, and select the operation
set in the Select the Operation Set dialog box, so as to copy the
members of the corresponding operation set. This can improve the
setting efficiency.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Click the added object set to view its relevant information in the right pane.

3.3.2 Object Set Management

The object set is the set of managed objects of a certain type. Via the object set
management, users can manage the equipment objects uniformly.

u The default object set provided by the UNM2000 is the complete set of the
objects, including all manageable objects. You cannot delete the default object
set, but can only modify its descriptions.

u When a certain user or user group is bound with an object set, this user or user
group will have the authority of the objects in this set.

u Only the users in the security administrator group and the sub-domain security
administrator group can manage the object sets.

3.3.2.1 Viewing Object Sets

The security administrator can view the objects included in the object set to check
whether the objects in the object set meet the requirements.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Administrator
group.

50 Version: B
3 Security Management

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Click Object Set in the left pane or click before Object Set in the left pane.
Then view the existing object sets in the right pane or the expanded list of
Object Set in the left pane.

3. Double-click the object set entry in the right pane to view details in the Basic
Information, Member and Service For tabs of the object set.

Other Operations

u In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Copy Cell,
Print or Export.

u Select a desired object set in the left pane, modify the corresponding
information in the right pane as needed and click Apply.

Note:

You can only modify the descriptions in the application operation


complete set and the object operation complete set.

Version: B 51
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3.3.2.2 Creating an Object Set

When the current object set cannot meet the requirements, you can create a new
object set.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Administrator
group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Object Set
dialog box.

No. Access Method


Click NMS User Management in the left pane and click Create Object Set in the
1
right pane.

Click NMS User Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select
2
Create Object Set from the shortcut menu.

3 Select Object Set in the left pane and click Create Object Set in the right pane.

Select Object Set in the left pane, right-click the right pane and select Create Object
4
Set from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Object Set in the left pane and select Create Object Set from the shortcut
5
menu.

3. In the Create Object Set dialog box, set the parameters in the Basic
Information and Member tabs.

Note:

Click Copy member form object set, and select the object set in the
Select object set dialog box, so as to copy the members of the
corresponding object set. This can improve the setting efficiency.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

52 Version: B
3 Security Management

Subsequent Operation

Click an added object set to view the information related to the object set in the right
pane.

3.3.3 Managing User Groups

The user group is the set of the network management users with the same
management authority. For the users to be granted with the same authority, you can
add them into the same user group and authorize the user group to make every
user in the user group have the same authority, quickly allocating the authority to
users.

u The default user groups of the UNM2000 include the Administrators group, the
security administrator group, the operator group, the maintainer group, and the
monitor group.

u When a user is bound with a user group, this user owns the authority assigned
to the user group.

u Only the users in Security Admin Group and Domain Security Admin Group
can manage user groups.

Caution:

You cannot delete the Administrators group and the security


administrator group, but can only modify their descriptions.

3.3.3.1 Viewing User Groups

The security administrator can view the administrative domains of the user groups
to check which objects are managed by the user group.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group.

Version: B 53
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Click User Group in the left pane or click before User Group, and you can
view the existing user groups in the right pane or the drop-down menu of User
Group.

3. Click the user group entry to view the details of the user group.

54 Version: B
3 Security Management

Note:

The Current Session tab displays the sessions of the online users in the
user group.

Other Operations

u In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Copy Cell,
Print or Export.

u Select the corresponding user group in the left pane, and modify the user group
information in the right pane through Find or Select.

3.3.3.2 Creating User Groups

When default user groups in the UNM2000 do not meet the requirements for user
authorization, you can create user groups according to the management features of
the users, which is convenient for assigning authority for users.

Version: B 55
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Administrator
group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create User Group
dialog box.

No. Access Method


Click NMS User Management in the left pane and click Create User Group in the
1
right pane.

Click NMS User Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane, and select
2
Create User Group in the shortcut menu.

3 Select User Group in the left pane, and click Create User Group.

Click User Group in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select Create User
4
Group from the shortcut menu.

Right-click User Group in the left pane, and select Create User Group from the
5
shortcut menu.

3. Table 3-1 shows how to set the user group parameters in the Create User
Group dialog box.

Table 3-1 The User Group Settings

Parameter Description

User Group
Compulsory. Sets the user group name.
Name
Sets the user group type to Sub Domain Security Administrator
Group or Ordinary User Group.
u Domain Security Admin Group: The Domain Security Admin
Basic
Group, with its management domain assigned by the
Information
User Group security administrator, only has the Security Management
Type authority, which cannot be modified.
u Ordinary User Group: The administrative domain and
operation authority of the users in this group are assigned
by the security administrator or sub domain security
administrator.

56 Version: B
3 Security Management

Table 3-1 The User Group Settings (Continued)

Parameter Description

The brief description of the user group, used to identify different


Description
user groups.

Sets the maximum number of sessions for users in the user


Maximum
group. It can be used to limit the number of sessions logged in by
Session
users in one user group in one time interval. Value range: 0 to
Number
100, Unlimited.
Sets the members of the user group via the Select and Delete
Member
buttons.
Sets the management domain of the user group. The objects of
the management domain are arranged in parallel in the tree
Domain topology of the devices, the global logical domains, and the
object groups. The valid management domain is the sum of the
selected devices, global logical domains, and object groups.

Sets the operation authority of the user group. The objects of the
operation authority are classified into the network management
application objects, all objects in the management system, and
Operation Authority
network devices. The network management application authority
includes the operation groups of the network management
application types and the network management operation list.

Note:

Click Copy Authority Settings from the User Group, set the user group
in the Select User Group dialog box, and directly copy the management
domain authority and operation authority of the corresponding user group.
This can improve the setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Click an added user group to view the information related to the user group in the
right pane.

Version: B 57
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3.3.4 Managing Users

The user refers to the person who uses the UNM2000. Users need to log into the
UNM2000 via the corresponding user account. The UNM2000 provides a default
superuser named admin.

Caution:

The authority of admin cannot be modified and the admin user cannot be
added to other user group.

3.3.4.1 Viewing Users

You can query the number and additional information of the UNM2000 users for
convenient user management.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Click User or before User in the left pane, and then view the existing users in
the right pane or the expanded list of User in the left pane.

58 Version: B
3 Security Management

3. Click a user entry and view the details of the user in the right pane.

Version: B 59
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

u In the right pane, click the button below the corresponding entry, or right-click
the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Unlock, Reset password,
Copy, Refresh, Print, Copy Cell, or Export.

u In the right pane, modify the information in the Basic Information and Access
Control List and then click Apply to apply the changes.

3.3.4.2 Creating Users

Create the UNM2000 user accounts and assign them with corresponding authority
so as to allocate the accounts to users of different responsibilities.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides a default user named admin. You cannot modify the
authority of admin or add it to other user groups, either.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Select one of the following access methods to display the Create User dialog
box.

No. Access Method


Click NMS User Management in the left pane and click Create User in the right
1
pane.

Click NMS User Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane, and
2
select Create User in the shortcut menu.
3 Click User in the left pane and then click the Create User button in the right pane.

Click User in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select Create User from
4
the shortcut menu.
5 Right-click User in the left pane and select Create User from the shortcut menu.

60 Version: B
3 Security Management

3. Table 3-2 shows how to set the user parameters in the Create user dialog box.

Table 3-2 User Settings

Parameter Description

Compulsory. Sets the user account, which must comply with the
Username account policies.For the settings of the account policies, see Setting
the Account Policy.

Real Name Sets the actual name of the user.


Employee
Sets the employee ID of the user.
Number
Contact Sets the contact information of the user for convenient management.

Description Description information of the user, for distinguishing users.

Required. Sets the user password, which must comply with the
Password password policies. For the settings of the password policies, see
Setting the Password Policy.
Basic Confirm
Required. Types the password again.
Infor- Password
ma- Modify
tion If this item is selected, when the corresponding user logs in again, he
Password on
or she will be requested to modify the password.
Next Login

User Cannot
If this item is selected, the corresponding user cannot modify the
Modify the
password via the client end.
Password
Account
Disabled If this item is selected, the corresponding user cannot log in.
Temporarily

Sets the password valid days.


u Select “Expire Days of System Password:Unlimited”, and the
Password
password will never be expired.
Valid Days
u Select Custom to set the number of days.
Value range: 2 to 999.

Maximum
Basic Online Sets the maximum online number of current users.
Infor- Number
ma- Exit after
tion waiting for a
Sets the waiting time for users to exit automatically.
(Ad- period
vanc- (minutes) of:
ed) Unlogged
Sets the policy for user accounts which do not log in for a long time.
User Policy

Version: B 61
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 3-2 User Settings (Continued)

Parameter Description

Login Time
Sets the time range for user's login.
Range

User Group Sets the user group to which this user belongs.

Sets the management domain of the user.


The objects of the management domain are arranged in parallel in
Domain the tree topology of the devices, the global logical domains, and the
object groups. The valid management domain is the sum of the
selected devices, global logical domains, and object groups.

Sets the operation authority of the user.


The objects of the operation authority are classified according to the
network management application objects, all objects in the
Operation Authority management system, and network devices. The network
management application authority includes the operation groups of
the network management application types and the network
management operation list.

Sets the access control list of the user.


u Select Use all access control list in the system, and the ACLs
set by the system will be used in the range of IP addresses
Access Control List logged in by the user account. For setting the ACLs of the
system, see Setting the Access Control List.
u Select Use the following assigned ACL to set the range of IP
addresses logged in by the user account.

Note:

Click Copy Privilege from Users, set the user in the Select User dialog
box, and directly copy the management domain and operation authority
of the corresponding user to improve the setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Click the added user in the left pane to view the information related to the user in the
right pane.

62 Version: B
3 Security Management

3.3.4.3 Unlocking Users

When the number of login attempts exceeds the limit set in the account
management policy at the client, the user will be locked. The user can be unlocked
via the following ways:

u The admin user resets the password of the user and you can login again.

u The users belonging to the Administrators group unlock the user.

Background Information

u Only the users in Security Admin Group and Domain Security Admin Group
can unlock users.

u The UNM2000 supports manual unlocking and automatic unlocking of the


locked user.

Prerequisite

The UNM2000 client end is locked.

Procedure

u Unlock the user manually.

1) Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display


the NMS User Management window.

2) Click before the User node to expand the user node.

3) Right-click the locked user, and select Unlock from the shortcut menu.

u Unlock the user automatically.

Set the automatic unlocking time according to Setting the Account Policy. The
locked user can log in only after the set automatic unlocking time expires.

3.3.4.4 Resetting the User Password

In case you forget your password, your password expires, or you are disallowed to
log into the UNM2000, you need to reset the password. The following instructs the
users in the security administrator group to reset the passwords of other users.

Version: B 63
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Background Information

The users in the Security Admin Group and the Domain Security Admin Group can
reset the passwords of all the users except the admin user. The password of the
admin user can only been modified by the admin user at the UNM2000 client end.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

2. Click before the User node to expand the user node.

3. Right-click the corresponding user, and select Reset Password from the
shortcut menu.

4. In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm
Password, and then click OK.

Note:

u The new password must comply with the set password policies. For
setting the password policies, see Setting the Password Policy.

u If Modify Password on Next Login is selected, the user must


modify the password upon next login.

3.4 Managing User Sessions

The users belonging to the Security Admin Group or Inspector Group can
monitor user sessions. You can understand the information of the current online
users in the system via monitoring the user sessions. The following introduces the
operations of monitoring the user sessions and activities.

3.4.1 Monitoring the User Session

By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of the online users.

64 Version: B
3 Security Management

Background Information

u Session: The connection set up between the client end and the server.

u When the user login mode is set to Multi-User Mode, one user account can log
in multiple client ends at the same time. You can specify the maximum number
of concurrent online users using a same account. For details, see Creating
Users.

u The object of forced exiting and sending messages is the user session. For
example, if the user account “user” logs in the same UNM2000 server via client
ends A and B, sessions a and b will be generated respectively. When the
account “user” generating session a is forced to exit, the account “user”
generating session b is not influenced.

Prerequisite

You have logged in as a member of the Security Administrator group.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

2. In the Monitoring User Session tab, view the information of the online user.

Other Operations

Right-click in the Monitor User Session tab and click Refresh, Copy Cell, Print or
Export.

Version: B 65
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3.4.2 Logging Out Users

By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of the online users and
log out the users who may influence the system security as needed, so as to ensure
the system security.

Background Information

u Session: The connection set up between the client end and the server.

u When the user login mode is set to Multi-User Mode, one user account can log
in multiple client ends at the same time. You can specify the maximum number
of concurrent online users using a same account. For details, see Creating
Users.

u The object of forced exiting and sending messages is the user session. For
example, if the user account “user” logs in the same UNM2000 server via client
ends A and B, sessions a and b will be generated respectively. When the
account “user” generating session a is forced to exit, the account “user”
generating session b is not influenced.

u The superuser admin can force all users except for itself to exit, and the users
in the security administrator can only force the common users to exit.

Prerequisite

You have logged in as a member of the Security Administrator group.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

2. In the Monitoring User Session tab, view the information of the online user.

3. Right-click the corresponding user session, and select Forced Offline from the
shortcut menu.

66 Version: B
3 Security Management

4. Type the reasons in the Forced Offline dialog box, and click OK.

3.4.3 Sending Messages to Online Users

Sending messages to online users implements the convenient communication


between users.

Background Information

u Session: The connection set up between the client end and the server.

u When the user login mode is set to Multi-User Mode, one user account can log
in multiple client ends at the same time. You can specify the maximum number
of concurrent online users using a same account. For details, see Creating
Users.

Version: B 67
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u The object of forced exiting and sending messages is the user session. For
example, if the user account “user” logs in the same UNM2000 server via client
ends A and B, sessions a and b will be generated respectively. When the
account “user” generating session a is forced to exit, the account “user”
generating session b is not influenced.

u The UNM2000 does not support the user of the current session sending
messages to himself or herself.

Prerequisite

You have logged in as a member of the Security Administrator group.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

2. In the Monitoring User Session tab, view the information of the online user.

3. Right-click the corresponding user session, and select Send Message from the
shortcut menu.

4. Type the message contents in the Send Message dialog box, and then click
OK.

3.4.4 Monitoring User Activities

You can monitor the user action information, so as to prevent illegal operations of
users.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to display the
NMS User Management window.

68 Version: B
3 Security Management

2. Click before the User node to expand the user node.

3. Click the corresponding user and click Activity Info in the right pane to view
the activity information of the user.

Note:

When an operation influences the UNM2000, you can perform operations


on the corresponding user accordingly. For example, log out the user in
the Monitor User Session window.

3.5 Authorization and Domain Division

The following takes assigning authority for users in two areas as example to
introduce how to create user accounts and assign authority.

Scenario Description

The devices in Area A and Area B are managed by UNM2000 for uniform
supervision. The device in Area A is monitored, operated and maintained by
working staff in Area A and the device in Area B is monitored, operated and
maintained by working staff in Area B. Therefore, the working staff in Area A and
Area B should be allocated with user accounts and authority respectively.

Version: B 69
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Create object sets.

Create object set A and object set B according to the area division. Add the
devices of Area A and Area B to the members of object set A and object set B.

For creating object sets, see Creating an Object Set.

2. Create operation sets.

Adopt the default operation sets according to the users' responsibilities.

4 The working staff responsible for monitoring: the application supervisor set
and the network supervisor set.

4 The working staff responsible for operation: the application operator set
and the network operator set.

4 The working staff responsible for maintenance: the application maintainer


set and the network maintainer set.

For creating operation sets, see Creating Operation Groups.

3. Create user groups.

According to the users' responsibilities, it is required to create six user groups,


as shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Creating User Groups

Manage-
User Group User Group
ment Operation Authority
Name Type
Domain
Inspector Common Object Group Application supervisor set and network
Group A user group A supervisor set

Operator Common Object Group Application operator set and network operator
Group A user group A set
Maintainer Common Object Group Application maintainer set and network
Group A user group A maintainer set
Inspector Common Object Group Application supervisor set and network
Group B user group B supervisor set

Operator Common Object Group Application operator set and network operator
Group B user group B set
Maintainer Common Object Group Application maintainer set and network
Group B user group B maintainer set

70 Version: B
3 Security Management

For details of creating user groups, see Creating User Groups.

4. Create users.

4 Create the user's basic information. Set the username and password. For
security, select Modify Password on Next Login or set the valid days of
the password.

4 Set the login time ranges according to the working shifts of the staff.

4 Set the users' user groups. If six user groups A, B, C, D, E, and F are to be
created, as shown in Table 3-4. After being assigned with a user group,
the user will be authorized with the management domain and operational
authority of the user group.

Table 3-4 Creating Users

User User Group

A Inspector Group A

B Operator Group A

C Maintainer Group A

D Inspector Group B

E Operator Group B

F Maintainer Group B

4 Set the access control list to restrict users' login IP address to the specified
ones.

For details of creating user groups, see Creating Users.

After completing the above configurations, provide the user accounts for the
corresponding staff.

Version: B 71
4 Configuration Management

The configuration management means the operations to configure the information of


the network and the system equipment, and is the most significant management
function of the UNM2000.

NE Communication Route Management

SNMP Parameter Template

ONU Capability Set Template

Managing Global Templates

Managing Global Configurations

Tracing Signaling

Configuration Synchronization

Network Access Management

Pinging NEs

Telnet NE

The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server

Migrating the PON Configuration

72 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

4.1 NE Communication Route Management

By using the NE communication management function, you can set the Manager
server IP address and the receiver address of Trap. The following introduces how to
manage NE communication routes.

Note:

You can configure multiple EMS server addresses when using distributed
deployment mode of EMS servers.

4.1.1 NE Management Program

The NE management program is used to set the communication protocol between


the UNM2000 and the device. Only when the NE management program is correctly
configured can normal communication between the UNM2000 and the device be
ensured so as to manage devices through the UNM2000.

4.1.1.1 Creating the Management Program

Correct configuration of the NE management program is the prerequisite to ensure


normal communication between the UNM2000 and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management from the main


menu to open the NE Communication Route Management tab.

Version: B 73
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

u The anm_manager-1507393536(127.0.0.1) is the default


management program. If no management program and no partition
are configured during the creation of the NE, the default
management program will be selected for the NE.

u It is supported only one NE communication routing management in


the singleton mode and no need to add.

2. Right-click NE Communication Route Management, and select Create


Management Program from the shortcut menu. Configure various parameters
of the management program, and click OK.

4.1.1.2 Deleting / Modifying a Management Program

In case of network resource adjustment and that changes are made to the
management program that the NE belongs to, you can delete the management
program and then create one or directly modify the management program to meet
your requirement.

Note:

Deleting the default management program is not supported.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management from the main


menu to open the NE Communication Route Management tab.

2. Delete a management program:

74 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

Note:

Deleting the default management program is not supported.

1) In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, right-


click the management program and select Delete the Manager from the
shortcut menu.

2) Click OK in the dialog box that appears to complete deleting the


management program.

3. Modify a management program:

1) In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, right-


click the management program and select Manager Property from the
shortcut menu.

2) Modify the parameters as needed in the Manager Properties dialog box


that appears, and then click OK.

3) Click Yes to save the settings.

Other Operations

1. In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, click →


Pass-through before the management program.The right pane displays the
pass-through NE list under the current management program.

2. Right-click an NE and select the corresponding operation from the shortcut


menu: Cancel Manager Management, Copy NE, Delete NE, modify NE
Attribute, etc.

Note:

Copy NE is used to copy the NE of the same type. After copying an NE,
users only need to modify the different parameters (such as the IP
address), so that they can create NEs rapidly.

Version: B 75
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4.1.1.3 Pre-configuration

The NEs in the Pre-configured communication NE list are those without


management program.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the


Communication Routing Management tab.

2. In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, click →


Pass-through before the management program.

3. Click a certain NE in the Pass-through NE List of the Manager in the right


pane and select Cancel Manager Management from the shortcut menu. This
NE is moved to Pre-configured NE list.

Subsequent Operation

1. Right-click a certain NE in the pre-configured common NE list and select Select


Management Object from the shortcut menu, or click a certain NE in the pre-
configured common NE list and click the Select Management Object button to
select a management program for the NE again.

2. Click OK. The NE is moved to the pass-through NE list.

76 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

4.1.2 Partition Policy Management

The partition policy can be used to divide the NEs in a same management program
according to the start IP address and end IP address of the partition. The NEs will
be assigned to the corresponding management program for management according
to the partition policy automatically after adding.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management from the main


menu to open the NE Communication Route Management tab.

2. Right-click Partition Policy Management in the left pane and select Create a
Partition from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, set the
parameters and click OK.

Note:

u Manager Name: Indicates the name of the created management


program.

u After the partition is created


4 If the management program has not been configured upon NE
creation, the UNM2000 will assign the corresponding
management program according to the partition to which the
NE's IP address belongs.
4 If the management program has been configured upon NE
creation, although inconsistent with the management program
of the partition to which the NE's IP address belongs, this
management program is still preferred.

Version: B 77
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click the created partition and select Create a Partition, Modify Partition or
Delete the Partition from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

4.2 SNMP Parameter Template

To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to
configure the SNMP parameters of NEs at the UNM2000.

You can directly configure the SNMP parameters of NEs at the UNM2000 side,
create NEs manually, or automatically apply the SNMP parameters by using the
applicable SNMP parameter template upon NE automatic discovery.

4.2.1 Creating and Using the SNMP Parameter Template

You can manage the SNMP parameter templates used for the communication
between the UNM2000 and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Background Information

The SNMP parameter template named default is the default template and cannot
be deleted. If no SNMP parameter template is set for an access NE during the
creation, the NE will use the default SNMP parameter template default.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→SNMP Parameter Template from the main menu to open


the SNMP Parameter Template Management tab.

2. Click Create to open the SNMP Parameter Template dialog box, set various
parameters and click Create.

3. Right-click the specific template and select Bind NE from the shortcut menu to
open the Select Bound NE dialog box. Select the NE to be bound and click
OK.

78 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

4. After the NE is bound, the information on the NE bound with the SNMP
parameter template will be displayed in the Binding NE Information pane.

Other Operations

Modify the SNMP parameter template bound with the NE.

1. In the main topology window, right-click the NE and select Attribute. The
Attribute Page dialog box appears on the right.

2. In the Basic Information dialog box, click the SNMP parameter template and
select a new template from the drop-down box to modify the SNMP parameter
template bound with the NE.

4.2.2 Modifying / Deleting an SNMP Parameter Template

You can manage the SNMP parameter templates used for the communication
between the UNM2000 and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Background Information

The SNMP parameter template named default is the default template and cannot
be deleted.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→SNMP Parameter Template from the main menu to open


the SNMP Parameter Template Management tab.

2. In the upper pane of the SNMP Parameter Template Management dialog box,
select the desired SNMP parameter template.

4 Modify the parameter settings in the SNMP Parameter Template pane at


the lower part and then click Modify.

4 Click Delete to delete the SNMP parameter template.

Version: B 79
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

The SNMP parameter template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

4.3 ONU Capability Set Template

The current method of adapting to the NE by adding the ONU type code cannot be
meet the ever-increasing requirements for adaptation of new terminal types.

With the ONU capability set template, you can configure the parameters such as
ONU port quantity, port type and resource type. The UNM2000 can deliver it to the
device to support the new type of ONU in real time, which quickly meet the
adaptation requirements without upgrading the device.

4.3.1 Adding an ONU Capability Set Template

You can create an ONU capability set template, configure the parameters such as
ONU port quantity, port type and resource type and then deliver it to the device to
quickly adapt to the new ONU.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The ONU capability set template is enabled.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→ONU Capability Set Template from the main menu to


open the ONU Capability Set Template tab.

2. Click or right-click in the blank area of the ONU Capability Set Template
and select Create Model.

3. In the displayed Create a ONU Capability Set Template dialog box, set
various parameters and click OK.

80 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

Other Operations

Binding an ONU capability set template

1. In the ONU Capability Set Template window, right-click the specified template.
Select Bind NE from the shortcut menu to open the Select Bound NE dialog
box.

2. Select the NE to be bound and click OK. After the NE is bound, the information
of the bound NE will be displayed in the Binding NE Information pane on the
right.

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

4.3.2 Modifying an ONU Capability Set Template

When the ONU capability set template cannot meet the user requirement, you can
modify the template as needed.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The ONU capability set template is enabled.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→ONU Capability Set Template from the main menu to


open the ONU Capability Set Template tab.

2. Select an ONU capability set template and click or right-click to select


Modify Model.

Other Operations

Deleting the ONU capability set template

1. In the ONU Capability Set Template window, select an ONU capability set

template and click or right-click to select Delete Template.

Version: B 81
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

4.4 Managing Global Templates

A template is a set of attributes with specific values. For example, if a template is


referenced to configure the resources, such as ADSL or G.SHDSL port, the
parameter values of the attributes preset in the template will be automatically
adopted by the resource.

You can use a template to configure multiple NEs of the same model in the
administrative domain of the entire network by using the global profile, so as to
improve the project start-up efficiency.

4.4.1 Viewing the Global Template

You can configure multiple NEs of the same model in the administrative domain of
the entire network in a batch manner by using the global profile, so as to improve
the project start-up efficiency.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Template of the AN5006–20 as an


example. You can follow the same procedures to view other templates
with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

82 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the
Line Profile tab.

3. Click the template entry in the ADSL Line Profile tab to view the NE bound
with the template.

Other Operations

In the ADSL Line Profile dialog box, right-click the template entry and select Add,
Delete, Batch Modify, Compare Templates, Bind to System Card / Port, etc.

4.4.2 Adding a Global Template

When the existing global templates do not meet the requirements or new global
templates are needed, follow the steps below to add global templates.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the Packets Rate Control Profile of the AN5116–
06B as an example. You can follow the same procedures to bind other
templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→Packets Rate Control Profile under the AN5116-06B


to open the Packets Rate Control Profile tab.

3. Click to open the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box, enter the
number of templates to be added and click OK.

4. Complete the parameter settings of the packet rate control template(s) in the
right pane and click . The system automatically generates the Global
Template ID.

Version: B 83
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4.4.3 Modifying a Global Template

When the existing global templates do not meet your requirements, you can create
global templates by following operations.

Background Information

u You can only modify the parameter settings of the template with the template
name unchanged after a global template is saved.

u The UNM2000 will automatically update the modified parameter settings of the
template.

If the template is bound with a device, the device will be issued automatically
after the parameter settings of the template is saved.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the Packets Rate Control Profile of the AN5116–
06B as an example. You can follow the same procedures to bind other
templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. Click Device Type→AN5116-06B→Global Profile→Packets Rate Control


Profile under the Global Template Management tab to open the Packets
Rate Control Profile tab.

3. On the Packets Rate Control Profile tab, right-click the desired template and
select Batch Modify to open the Batch Modify dialog box.

84 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

4. Modify the parameter settings in the Batch Modify dialog box and click Apply
→OK at the lower part to save the changes.

4.4.4 Binding / Unbinding a Global Template

You can bind a global template with a device so that the parameter settings of the
device are consistent with those set in the global template in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the Packets Rate Control Profile of the AN5116–
06B as an example. You can follow the same procedures to bind other
templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. Double-click Global Profile→Packets Rate Control Profile under the


AN5116-06B to open the Packets Rate Control Profile tab.

3. Select a template and click , or right-click it and select Save to System to


open the Select Object dialog box. Select a desired system and click OK.

Version: B 85
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4. Bind a card / port (for the template to be bound with a card / port).

1) Select a template and click , or right-click it and select Bind to


System Card / Port to open the First Select NE dialog box. Select a
desired NE and click Next.

2) The Please Select ONU Port dialog box appears. Select a desired port
and click Next. After the binding is completed, the corresponding binding
information appears in the Binding NE Information pane.

5. Unbind a template.

1) In the Packets Rate Control Profile dialog box, click .

2) In the displayed Select Object dialog box, select the device information
and click OK to unbind the template from the device.

Other Operations

Select the shortcut menu or click the button on the toolbar to perform the
corresponding operation on the template, such as Delete, Batch Modify, Delete
from System and Compare Templates.

4.4.5 Deleting a Global Template

When a global template is no longer needed, you can delete it.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The template to be deleted is not bound with any device; otherwise, see
Binding / Unbinding a Global Template to unbind the template from the device.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Template as an example. You can
follow the same procedures to delete other templates with the only
difference in the access method.

86 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. Select ADSL Line Profile in the left pane to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

3. Click to open the Configure the Selection Range dialog box, select the
corresponding range according to the quantity of templates to be deleted and
then click OK.

4.5 Managing Global Configurations

The global configuration is a set of attributes with specific values. You can use the
global configuration to configure NEs of multiple types (non-template) in the
administrative domain of the entire network, so as to improve the project start-up
efficiency.

4.5.1 Viewing Global Configurations

You can configure NE devices of multiple types (non-template) within a global


network management domain uniformly, so as to enhance the project provisioning
efficiency.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the Voip Service Vlan under Voice Service Config
of the AN5006–30 as an example. You can follow the same procedures
to view other templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

Version: B 87
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. In the left pane, select Global Config→Voice Service Config→Voip Service


Vlan to open the Voip Service Vlan tab and view the existing voice VLAN
configuration data.

4.5.2 Adding the Global Configuration

When the existing global configurations do not meet the requirements or new global
configurations are needed, follow the steps below to add the global configuration.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the IGMP Mode under Service Config of the
AN5116-06B as an example. You can follow the same procedures to
perform the operation on other global configurations with the only
difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Global Config→Service Config→IGMP Mode to open


the IGMP Mode tab.

3. Click to open the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box, enter the
number of entries to be added and click OK.

4. In the multicast mode dialog box, complete the parameter settings and click
. The system generates the Global Configuration ID automatically.

4.5.3 Modifying the Global Configuration

When the existing global configurations do not meet your requirements, you can
modify the global configurations according to your needs.

88 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the IGMP Mode under Service Config of the
AN5116-06B as an example. You can follow the same procedures to
perform the operation on other global configurations with the only
difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Global Config→Service Config→IGMP Mode to open


the IGMP Mode tab.

3. In the IGMP Mode tab, right-click the desired configuration entry and select
Batch Modify to open the Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Modify the parameter settings in the Batch Modify dialog box and click Apply
→OK at the lower part to save the changes.

4.5.4 Issuing the Global Configuration to Device

The following introduces how to issue the global configuration to device and make
the device parameter consistent with the global configuration parameter.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: B 89
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

The following uses the ARP Proxy Switch under Service Config of the
AN5116-06B as an example. You can follow the same procedures to
perform the operation on other global configurations with the only
difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. in the left pane, select Global Config→Service Config→ARP Proxy Switch


to open the ARP Proxy Switch tab.

3. Select the configuration and click or right-click the Save to Database


from the shortcut menu to open the Configure the Selection Range dialog box.
Select range and click OK.

4. Select the configuration and click or right-click the Save to Database from
the shortcut menu to open the Configure the Selection Range dialog box.
Select range and click OK.

4.5.5 Deleting a Global Configuration Template

When a global template is no longer needed, you can delete it.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the Voip Service Vlan under Voice Service Config
of the AN5006–30 as an example. You can follow the same procedures
to delete other templates with the only difference in the access method.

90 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open


the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Global Config→Voice Service Config→Voip Service


Vlan to open the Voip Service Vlan tab.

3. Select the global config needed to be deleted, click to delete the object.

4.6 Tracing Signaling

Tracing the signaling is used to trace the signaling frame of the communication
between the current IAD and the voice communication card, so as to find the
communication faults in a timely manner.

Background Information

This function is only supported by the FTTH-type and FTTB-type ONUs that support
voice service.

Prerequisite

Set the Signaling Trace Reporting Enable Status of the signaling-traced object to
Enable in the SNMP TRAP Receiver IP (NE Manager→Local Service Config).

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Configure→Signaling Tracing to open the Select


Signaling Tracing Object dialog box.

2. Select the signaling tracing object in the pane and click OK. Add one row in the
right pane. Then set IP address, Four-layer source port number, and 4
Layer Destination Port Number.

3. Click OK to open the Signal Trace tab.

4. Click Start to perform tracing signaling.

Version: B 91
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4.7 Configuration Synchronization

The configuration synchronization function implements the comparison between the


configuration data in the UNM2000 and that on the device. If any difference is
detected, the corresponding data will be downloaded or uploaded to ensure
consistency of the configuration.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Configuration Synchronization from the UNM2000 main


menu to display the Configuration Synchronization tab.

2. Click Add Selected and Sub-items to open the add ne dialog box, select the
objects to be compared and select OK. The Configuration Synchronization
tab displays the added NE whose configuration is to be synchronized.

3. Select the objects to be compared in the configuration synchronization NE list,


and click Configuration Comparison to compare the configuration.

4. View the comparison result in the lower part of the Configuration Comparison
tab.

92 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

Subsequent Operation

When the comparison results are different, you can click Config Upload or Config
Download to upload or download the configuration according to Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Configuration Uploading / Downloading

Button Description

Uploads the configuration data of the equipment to the


Config upload
network management database.

Downloads the configuration data from the network


Config download
management database to the equipment.

4.8 Network Access Management

The network access management helps you analyze and observe the resource
interconnection status and network access status of the system and the line card.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Version: B 93
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Network Access Status Management to open the


Register Status Management tab.

2. Select the desired object in the object tree and select the Query Status button
to query the resource management system interconnection status and
registration status of the object.

3. Select the system / card to be registered in the object tree, and click the Send
RMS Connection Status or Send the Selected Line Card RMS Connection
Status button to enable the interconnection with the resource management
system.

4. Select the system / card to be registered and click the Initiate Registration or
Initiate Registration of the Selected Line Cards button. After the registration
succeeds, the status is as shown in the following figure.

94 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

5. Click the Write DB or Read DB button to write the configuration into the
database or read the configuration from the database.

4.9 Pinging NEs

The Ping operation is used to check whether the communication between NEs and
the EMS is normal.

Procedure

1. Right-click the object in the main topology object tree and select Pingfrom the
shortcut menu. In the displayed Command Tool dialog box, view the Ping
operation result.

4.10 Telnet NE

When the UNM2000 client cannot access the device directly, it can access the
device via Telnet or access the Telnet proxy server to perform operations via CLI.
For setting the Telnet proxy server, see Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server.

Version: B 95
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Right-click the object in the main topology object tree and select Telnet from
the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed Command Tool dialog box, enter the username and password
to log into the CLI and perform operations via the CLI.

4.11 The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server

The UNM2000 supports performing the Tacert operation from the UNM2000 server
to the specified IP address.

Background Information

The Tracert (tracing the route) function is used to test the gateway that the data
packet passes from the source host to the destination. It mainly checks whether the
network connection is reachable and analyzes the failure occurrence location in the
network. The Tracert command uses the IP Time to Live (TTL) field and the ICMP
error message to determine the route from a host to another host in the network.

The command is Tracert on Windows OS and it is Traceroute on UNIX OS.

Prerequisite

u The authority of the Tracert function is configured in the authority and domain
division management. Only if have the corresponding authority can you perform
the Tracert function.

u At present, it only needs to support sending the Tracert packet to the IP


address in the IPv4 format, and it does not need to support sending the Tracert
packet to the IP address in the IPv6 format and the host domain name.

Procedure

1. In the Main Topology pane of the UNM2000 main topology, right-click Local
NMS and select Server tracert.

96 Version: B
4 Configuration Management

2. In the Server Tracert Tool command dialog box, enter the specified IP address
and press Enter. The Tracert result appears in the command window.

4.12 Migrating the PON Configuration

The UNM2000 supports PON configuration migration as well as the PON port
configuration migration.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→PON Configuration Migration from the main menu to


open the Operation Instructions alert box.

2. Click OK to open the PON Configuration Migration dialog box.

3. Set the parameters, such as source OLT and destination OLT.

4. Click Execute.

5. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

Version: B 97
5 Topology Management

The topology management is used to create and manage the topology architecture
of the entire network, so as to present the network connection status and operating
status of the equipment. You can view the topology objects and real-time alarm
prompts in the topology view.

Topology Creation Flow

Creating a Global Logical Domain

Creating NEs

Adding Cards

Creating a Link

Editing an NE

Editing a Fiber Connection

Browsing the Topology View

Deleting the Topology

98 Version: B
5 Topology Management

5.1 Topology Creation Flow

The creation flow of the network topology describes the creation procedures of the
subnet, NEs, cards and links as well as the relationship among the operation tasks.
The creation flow of the network topology is as shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 Flow for Creating the Network Topology

In the creation flowchart, the horizontal procedures indicate the four phases of the
network topology creation: creating the subnet, creating the NE, creating the card
and creating the link; the vertical procedures indicate the operation tasks included in
each phase.

The creation flow of the network topology is as shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Description of the Network Topology Creation Flow

Procedure Operation Description

Manage the Create a global For convenient management, the topological objects in the same area or of the
subnet logical domain similar attributes can be placed and displayed at the same topological layer.

To manage the physical devices through the UNM2000, you need to create the
Create the NE corresponding NEs in the UNM2000. Creating NEs includes creating the
access NE and virtual NE, and discovering the NE automatically.

Configure the NE The NEs are not configured after being created. Before managing the NEs via
Manage the data the UNM2000, you need to configure the NE data first.
NE The NE ID is the unique identifier of the NE. During the network planning, each
NE must be assigned an unique ID. In case of NE ID conflicts, the route
Modify the NE ID conflicts will occur and consequently some NEs cannot be managed. To adjust
the original planning and modify the NE ID during debugging or capacity
expansion, you can modify it through the UNM2000.

Version: B 99
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 5-1 Description of the Network Topology Creation Flow (Continued)

Procedure Operation Description

Modify the NE You can modify the NE name as needed at any time. Modifying the NE name
name does not influence the running of the NE.

If an inappropriate NE is created, you can delete it in the UNM2000. Deleting


Delete the NE the NE will cause loss of all information related to the NE in the UNM2000;
however, it will not influence the running of the device.

During manual configuration of NE data, if a physical card is added after


Add the card
Manage the configuring the NE data, you need to add the card on the NE panel.
card In case of network configuration change or modifying the card configuration the
Delete the card
NE is required, you can delete the card from the NE panel.

Create the link You can create links, cables as well as virtual fibers on the UNM2000.
Modify the fiber
You can modify the name, attenuation, length and type of the fiber according
Manage the connection
the connection status and physical features of the fiber.
link information
To delete an NE or modify the fiber connection between NEs during network
Delete the fiber
adjustment, you need to delete the fiber connection between the NEs.

5.2 Creating a Global Logical Domain

For convenient management of NEs, you can customize logical domains and place
the NEs in the same area or of the same attribute into a same logic domain. The
domain is a set of various NEs, and sub logical domains can be created under it.
For example, you can create a logical domain named Site A, and then create sub
logical domains Area 1, Area 2, etc. under Site A.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Create Logical Domain to open the Create Global


Logical Domain dialog box.

2. In the Create Global Logical Domain dialog box, set various parameters, in
which the logical domain name is required and other parameters are optional .

100 Version: B
5 Topology Management

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created logical domain appears
in the main topology.

Other Operations

Right-click the logical domain and select the shortcut menus to perform the
corresponding operations.

5.3 Creating NEs

To manage the physical devices through the UNM2000, you need to create the
corresponding NEs in the UNM2000. There are two ways to create the NEs: Manual
creation and automatic discovery. For creating the network topology architecture,
manual creation of NEs in a batch manner is recommended. For network capacity
expansion, automatic discovery of NEs is recommended.

5.3.1 Create Access NE

Only when the access NE is created can the access devices be managed via the
UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main topology, right-click to select Create NE→Create Access NE, or


select Resource→Create NE→Create Access NE from the main menu to
open the Create Access NE dialog box.

2. Set the parameters according to Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Settings of Creating the Access NE

Parameter Description Comment


NE Type NE type.

After the NE type is selected, the corresponding subrack


Default Shelf Type Required.
(shelf) type will be determined by the system.

NE Name The name of the NE for identification.

Version: B 101
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 5-2 Settings of Creating the Access NE (Continued)

Parameter Description Comment


IP address of the
The IP address of the NE.
NE
NE Mask The mask of the NE.
NE Gateway The IP address of the gateway NE.

The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main


Alias Name topology will display the alias; If this item is not configured,
the main topology will display the NE name.

NE SN
Optional
Manufacturer
Name
The NE attribute information used for identifying the NE.
Remark
Username
Password
Longitude The longitude and latitude of the physical area to which the
Latitude device locates, convenient for locating.

Topo Level The topological level to which the NE belongs.

The management program to which the NE belongs. If this


item is not configured, this NE belongs to the management
Manager program of its partition; if this item is not configured and no -
partition exists, this NE belongs to the default management
program.

The template used for the communication between the


SNMP Parameter
UNM2000 server and various NEs. Generally, the default -
Template
template is selected.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created access NE appears in
the logical domain or main topology.

5.3.2 Automatic Discovery of NEs

The UNM2000 supports the NE automatic discovery function. You can set the
desired IP segment, in which the NEs will be discovered automatically and created
in the UNM2000. Meanwhile, the configuration data will be uploaded, adding the
NEs to the UNM2000 for management.

102 Version: B
5 Topology Management

5.3.2.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can view the created NE automatic discovery task to automatically discover the
NE information such as IP address, type and status.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab, to
view the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

4 Select Resource→Auto Detect NE Task from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window. Select Data Synchronization→Auto
Detect NE Task from the left pane.

2. Click the created NE automatic discovery task in the left pane to view the NE IP
address, NE type and status.

5.3.2.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task

You can set the system to discover the NEs inside the appointed IP address range
as required and create the discovered NE automatically.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: B 103
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab.

4 Select Resource→Auto Detect NE Task from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window. Select Data Synchronization→Auto
Detect NE Task from the left pane.

2. Click the Create button at the bottom of the tab, or right-click Auto Detect NE
Task in the left pane to open dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information and Extend information tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

u Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name
from other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

u In the Extend information tab, click Import IP Address to import


the IP addresses in a batch manner.

5.3.2.3 Automatic Discovery of NEs

You can set the system to discover the NEs inside the appointed IP address range
as required and create the discovered NE automatically.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab, to
view the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

4 Select Resource→Auto Detect NE Task from the main menu.

104 Version: B
5 Topology Management

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window. Select Data Synchronization→Auto
Detect NE Task from the left pane.

2. Right-click a corresponding task and select Execute Now, or select the task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the NE
auto discovery task.

5.4 Adding Cards

After configuring the NE data, you need to add cards in the NEs. You can manually
add cards or have the cards added automatically.

5.4.1 Adding Cards Automatically

The physical configuration detection function enables you to implement the


automatic discovery of physical cards, which then can be synchronized to the
UNM2000 automatically using the synchronization operation.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Detect Physical Configuration from the main menu to


open the Detect Physical Configuration tab.

2. Select the system to be detected in the object tree pane, and click Detect
Physical Configuration (D) at the lower part of the tab to execute the
detection command. Then you can view the information of the detected cards
and ports.

Version: B 105
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Select the synchronization mode according to Table 5-3, and click the
Synchronize All button to synchronize the configuration of detected cards to
the UNM2000.

Table 5-3 Synchronization Mode

Synchronization Mode Meaning

Only synchronizes the added cards in the physical configuration


Incremental
(against the current configuration in the UNM2000).

Overrides the current configuration in the UNM2000 with the newest


Cover type
physical card configurations.

5.4.2 Adding Cards Manually

You can add cards manually or pre-configure the cards as required.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The NE has been created.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager


from the shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. Add the card.

4 Adding all cards

a) Right-click the subrack in the device tree and select Add All Cards
from the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes. The UNM2000 adds all the
cards to the recommended locations respectively.

c) Right-click the card and select Delete Card / Replace Card from the
shortcut menu to adjust the inserted cards according to the quantity
and location of actual cards of the project.

4 Adding a single card

106 Version: B
5 Topology Management

Right-click the slot of the card in the subrack view and select Add Card→
Add XXX Card from the shortcut menu according to the actual cards and
card location in the project.

Subsequent Operation

6.7 describes how to authorize the added cards and deliver the configuration to the
devices.

5.5 Creating a Link

Since there are no physical connections between the OLT devices, you can create
connections between any two NEs in the UNM2000 for convenient topology
management.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The NE data and card data have been configured.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view, and select Create
Virtual Link from the shortcut menu to open the Create the Virtual
Connection dialog box.

2. Table 5-4 shows how to set the parameters.

Table 5-4 Description of Parameters in the Create the Virtual Connection Dialog Box

Parameter Description

Name The name of the virtual connection.


Source End NE The source NE of the virtual connection.
Sink NE The destination NE of the connection.
Remark The remark information of the fiber used for creating the connection.

The media type of the fiber, including G625, G653, G654 and G655. The
Media Type
default type is G625.

Link Cost The line cost of the fiber.


Designed
The attenuation of the fiber.
Attenuation

Version: B 107
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 5-4 Description of Parameters in the Create the Virtual Connection Dialog Box
(Continued)

Parameter Description

Length The length of the fiber.

Link Number The connection numbering of the fiber.

Associated Link
The associated connection numbering of the fiber.
Number
Includes the following four types:
u Forward: The connection line has an arrow from the source NE to the
Direction
sink NE.
u Bidirectional: The connection line has bidirectional arrows.
Control Point
Includes folding line and curve.
Format
Width The width of the connection line.
Color The color of the connection.
Link Type The line type of the connection. Options are solid line and dashed line.

3. After the setting is completed, click OK. The connection line appears between
the source and sink NEs.

5.6 Editing an NE

After configuring the NE basic data, you can set the NE attribute (NE name, NE IP
address, etc.) and NE icon according to the management requirement.

5.6.1 Setting NE Attributes

After creating NEs, you can modify the NE attributes (NE name, NE IP address,
etc.) according to the network running status and management requirement.

u Modifying the NE name does not influence the running of the NE.

u Inappropriate IP address settings may cause anomalous communication


between the UNM2000 and the NE or between NEs. This type of failures can
be eliminated by modifying the NE IP address.

108 Version: B
5 Topology Management

u When the active management IP (NE IP address) is interrupted, the service will
be automatically switched to the standby management IP address, and the
system displays the communication anomaly alarm of the active management
channel and filters the system communication interruption alarm.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the Object Tree or Physical Topology View menu, right-click the desired
NE and select Attribute from the shortcut menu to open the Attribute Page
pane.

2. Modify the NE attributes as needed.

3. Click to apply the settings.

5.6.2 Editing Icons

You can modify the size and pattern of the NE icon according to your preference.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the Physical Topology View, right-click the NE whose icon is to be edited


and select Edit the Icon from the shortcut menu to open the Edit Icon dialog
box.

2. Modify the size and pattern of the NE icon and preview the icon at the lower
part of the dialog box.

3. After the completion of the editing icon, click OK and the NE icon turns into the
pattern you preferred.

Version: B 109
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

5.6.3 Setting the Displayed Content of the Icon

You can set whether to display the NE IP address and type in the NE icon,
facilitating NE query in the topograph.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select View→Topology View→Show NE IP or View→Topology View→


Show NE Type. These sub-menu options will be selected and the NE icon will
display its IP address and type.

5.6.4 Tagging the NE

You can make special tags on the NEs to distinguish NEs of difference levels of
attention.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select the NE to be marked in the object tree pane of the Main Topology.

2. Select Resource→Mark the NE As from the main menu.

3. In the Identifier NE dialog box, enter the tag content and click OK.

5.6.5 Querying a Label

The following introduces how to query marked objects.

110 Version: B
5 Topology Management

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Label Query to open the Label Query tab, which displays
all the objects marked with labels by default.

2. Do as follows:

4 Reset Query: Click Reset Query to open the Reset Query dialog box and
then set the flag name and applicable object to search for the object with a
specific flag.

4 Refresh: Click Refresh to refresh the objects in the tab.

4 Locate to Object: Select the desired object and click Locate to Object to
locate the object in the Main Topology tab.

4 Delete the Flag: Select the object and click Delete the Flag to delete the
flag of the object.

5.6.6 Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner

When the network is of large scale, you can modify the names of the logical
domains, NEs and ONUs into easy-to-identify names in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

1. Select Resource→Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner from the main menu


to open the Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner tab.

2. select NE in the left pane of the Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner tab to
modify the NE names in a batch manner.

1) Click Set Object Query Conditions to open the Set Object Query
Condition dialog box. Then query and modify the object, and click OK.

2) Select any of the following three ways to modify NE names in a batch


manner.

¡ Modify the NE names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

i) Click Excel Import to open the Import Data dialog box. Select
Download Template to download the Excel file template.

Version: B 111
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

ii) In the downloaded Excel template table, enter the Logical


Address and Current Name of the desired NEs and then enter
the Preview Name (name displayed after being modified) of the
NEs according to the requirements.

iii) In the Import Data dialog box, select View File to upload the
Excel table edited and then click OK.

¡ Set the modification rules to modify the NE names in a batch manner.

i) Select the desired NEs and click Batch Modify to open the
Batch Modify dialog box.

ii) Set the batch modification rule in the Batch Modify dialog box
according to Table 5-5, and then click OK.

Table 5-5 Settings in the Batch Modify Dialog box

Parameter Description

Description The descriptive information of the batch modification rule.

The prefix characters of the object to be modified, not


Prefix characters
involved in incremental value.
Starting value The starting value of the object to be modified.
Settings The suffix characters of the object to be modified, not
Suffix characters
involved in incremental value.
Incremental
The incremental value of the object to be modified.
value

iii) In the Confirm information alert box, click Yes to confirm the
modification.

iv) In the Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner tab, check the new
names under the Preview Name column. After the confirmation,
click Save.

¡ Set the replacement rules to modify the NE names in a batch manner.

i) Select the desired NEs and click Replace in a Batch Manner to


open the Replace in a Batch Manner dialog box.

ii) Enter the original NE names and new NE names in the Search
Characters and Replace with and textboxes and then click OK.

iii) In the Confirm information alert box, click Yes to confirm the
replacement.

112 Version: B
5 Topology Management

iv) In the Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner tab, check the new
names under the Preview Name column. After the confirmation,
click Save.

Note:

In the left pane of the Modify NE Names in a Batch Manner tab, click
Logical Domain or ONU to modify the names of logical domains or
ONUs according to Step 2.

5.7 Editing a Fiber Connection

This section introduces how to modify the connection line properties and how to
expand / collapse the connection line.

5.7.1 Modifying the Connection Line Properties

You can modify the properties of the connection line between NEs, such as
direction, type and width.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the connection line between NEs and select Connection


Properties from the shortcut menu to open the Link Attribute dialog box.

2. Modify the connection line direction, control point format, width and color as
needed.

3. After modification, click OK.

5.7.2 Setting the Display Mode of the Connection Line

When there are multiple connection lines between the NEs, you can collapse or
expand the lines.

Version: B 113
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the connection line between the NEs and set the display mode.

4 Collapse the connection lines: After Collapse line is selected from the
shortcut menu, the collapsed line is added with a + symbol, and the
connection line names are hidden.

4 Expand the lines: After the Expand line is selected from the shortcut menu,
the connection lines are expanded, each of which is displayed with its
name.

5.8 Browsing the Topology View

In the physical topology view, you can browse the NE topology monitored by the
UNM2000 and relevant information.

5.8.1 Checking the Physical Topology View

In the physical topology view, you can check the NE topology monitored by the
UNM2000 and relevant information.

Procedure

1. Click the Main Topology tab and select Physical Topology View from the
Current View drop-down list.

2. The Current View window displays the information of the devices in the
topology.

Subsequent Operation

Perform the following operations via the shortcut menus:

u Set the topology background image.

114 Version: B
5 Topology Management

In the image mode, right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view
and select Set Background Image or Use the Default Background Image
from the shortcut menu to set the background image of the physical topology
view.

u Expand / collapse all logical domains.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Expand
All Logic Domains or Collapse All Logic Domains.

u Hide nodes.

Right-click the NE in the physical topology view and select Hidden Node from
the shortcut menu. The NE will not appear in the physical topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Manage
the Hidden Nodes to open the Hide Node Management dialog box. Then
select the nodes to be displayed and click OK. The corresponding nodes are
displayed in the physical topology view.

u According to Table 2-2, you can lock, move, zoom in or zoom out the physical
topology view by clicking the shortcut icons on the top of the view.

5.8.2 Viewing the Sub-topology View

By checking the sub-topology view, you can view the topology relationship between
various physical units of the NE, including the subrack, cards, and ports.

Procedure

1. Right-click the NE in the object tree pane or the physical topology and select
View Topology to open the Sub-topology View tab of the corresponding NE.

2. The Sub-topology View tab displays all the information of the NE, including
the subrack, card and the connection of the port.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations in the sub-topology view via the shortcut
menus.

Version: B 115
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Set the background image.

Right-click the blank area in the Sub-topology View tab, and select Set
Background Image or Use the Default Background Image to set the
background image of the sub-topology view.

u Set the layout style.

1) Right-click the blank area in the Sub-topology View tab, and select
Layout Mode to open the Layout Mode dialog box.

2) Adjust the layout style as required, and preview the adjustment results in
the Preview pane.

3) Click OK.

u Hide node.

Right-click the node in the sub-topology view, and select Hidden Node; then
the selected node will not be displayed in the sub-topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the sub-topology view and select Manage the
Hidden Nodes to open the Hide Node Management dialog box. Then select
the nodes to be displayed and click OK. Then the corresponding nodes will be
displayed in the sub-topology view.

u Edit icons.

Right-click the node in the sub-topology view, and select Edit the Icon, in the
Edit Icon dialog box, set the size and style of the node icon, and click OK.

116 Version: B
5 Topology Management

u Table 2-2 describes how to lock, move, zoom in, and zoom out the sub-
topology view via the shortcut icons at the top part of sub-topology view.

u Add splitter

Right-click the PON object in the sub-topology view, and select Add Splitter. In
the Add Optical Splitter dialog box, set parameter of the splitter and then click
OK.

5.8.3 Viewing the Thumbnail

The Bird-eye View displays the thumbnail of the topology. In case the topology
window displays only part of the view, you can browse the full view, understand the
topology architecture as well as locate the display area of the topology view via
Bird-eye View.

Procedure

1. On the toolbar above the topology view, click to open the Bird-eye View,
which displays the thumbnail of the corresponding topology.

Note:

In the Bird-eye View window, only the area within the purplish red frame
is displayed. Drag this area to locate the display zone of the topology.

5.8.4 Searching Objects

You can search for and locate the object quickly via the object search functions.

Background Information

The objects include NEs, logical domains and cards.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Search Object from the main menu.

Version: B 117
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. In the displayed Advanced Search dialog box, set the object type, search type
and search content, and then click Search.

3. Select the desired object in the search result and click Localize. The Main
Topology tab will automatically go to the area that the NE locates in and mark
the target object.

118 Version: B
5 Topology Management

5.9 Deleting the Topology

Typically, you need to delete the objects in the network topology before adjusting
the topology.

5.9.1 Deleting the Global Logical Domain

When adjusting the network topology, you can delete the subnet logical domain that
is no longer needed from the topology view. After a logical domain is deleted, the
objects in this logical domain will be moved to its upper-level logical domain.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the logical domain of the main topology window and select Delete
from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

5.9.2 Delete the NE

In case an inappropriate NE is created or changes are made to an NE during


network adjustment, you can delete the NE in the UNM2000. Deleting the NE will
cause loss of all information related to the NE in the UNM2000; however, it will not
influence the running of the device.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the desired NE and select Delete from the shortcut menu.

2. Click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

Version: B 119
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Caution:

Deleting an NE will delete all the related connections simultaneously.

5.9.3 Deleting the Card

In case of network configuration change or modifying the card configuration of the


NE is required, you can delete the card from the NE.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager
from the shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. Delete the card.

4 Delete all cards.

a) Right-click the subrack in the device tree and select Delete All Cards
from the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

4 Delete a single card

a) Right-click the desired card in the device tree and select Delete Card
from the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

Subsequent Operation

6.7 describes how to authorize cards and delivery configuration to device.

120 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

The following introduces how to manage the access NEs using the UNM2000.

NE Manager GUI

Configuring the Local Service

ONU Query Management

Authorizing ONUs

ONU Registration Management

Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port

Authorizing Cards

Synchronizing ONUs Manually

Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs

Authorizing ONUs Manually

OTDR Link Management

System Maintenance

Upgrading Cards

Managing Test Tasks

Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

Version: B 121
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.1 NE Manager GUI

The NE Manager GUI is the main GUI for managing the devices. You can perform
operations based on NEs as well as configure, manage and maintain the NEs,
cards or ports separately. You can select the corresponding operation object and the
corresponding function in the main menu of the NE manager to search for and use
the related configuration items of the function.

Access Method

Right-click the object in the object tree of the main topology and select Open NE
Manager from the shortcut menu to access the NE Manager GUI, as shown in
Figure 6-1.

(1) Device tree / Operational tree pane (2) Main menu

(3) Toolbar (4) Alarm statistical panel

(5) Display pane

Figure 6-1 NE Manager GUI

122 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

6.2 Configuring the Local Service

The following introduces the access method and GUI layout of the Local Service
Configuration function in the NE Manager.

Access Method

1. Click an NE in the Main Topology of the UNM2000.

2. Click Resource→Open NE Manager from the UNM2000 main menu.

3. In the NE Manager main menu, select Configuration→Local Service


Configuration→PON service.

GUI Introduction

The Local Service Config window contains the Operational Tree, Service
Configuration Tab and Operation Information Displayed Pane, as shown in
Figure 6-2.

(1) Operational tree pane (2) Service configuration (3) Operation information
pane pane

Figure 6-2 Local Service Configuration GUI

Version: B 123
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.3 ONU Query Management

By querying the system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU,
you can quickly acquaint yourself with the distribution of the ONU.

6.3.1 Querying ONUs

With the ONU query function, you can find the desired ONU quickly and view the
system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU.

The UNM2000 supports querying ONUs by different ONU attributes. It supports


both fuzzy match and complete match. The ONU query conditions fall into two parts:

u General query conditions: Include the logical domain, device type, ONU PON
type, device name, friendly name, logical ID, physical ID, OLT IP address,
management IP address, and voice service and data service of the ONU.

u Advanced query conditions: Include slot No., ONU No., ONU password, logical
SN password, optical splitter No., optical splitter port No., ONU label, ONU user
information and ONU service class.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Set ONU Query Conditions dialog box.

3. After completing the settings, click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs
meeting the query conditions.

124 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

4. In the Query ONU tab, select one or more entries and click Service
Configuration at the lower-right corner to go to the NE Manager window. Then
you can query the service configuration information of the ONU device.

Subsequent Operation

Right-click an ONU, select Service Configuration, Locate to ONU List or Service


Configuration from the shortcut menu.

6.3.2 Viewing the ONU List

You can view the ONU details and configure the ONUs.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List to


open the ONU List tab.

Version: B 125
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. You can perform the following operations as required.

Note:

The following uses Port Service Config, Service Configuration and


View Details as an example to introduces how to perform the operations.

4 Port service configuration

In the ONU List tab, select a port and click Port Service Config to view
the port type of the ONU service and the number of ports of different types.

4 Service Configuration

126 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

In the ONU List tab, select a port and click Service Configuration to
access the designated ONU service configuration tab and perform the
service configuration of the ONU.

Note:

Right-click the designated configuration option in the Operational Tree


and select Favorite from the shortcut menu to save this option in the
favorite folder, so that the user can find it quickly next time. Select Cancel
Favorite to remove this option from the favorite folder.

4 View details

Click View Details to view the detailed information of the specified ONU,
including ONU Port Panel, ONU Information, ONU Service Information,
Port Status Information, ONU MAC address, ONU Callback
Information, QINQ Domain Attach Information, Under ONU and Parent
ONU.

Version: B 127
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.3.3 ONU Query Example

With the ONU query function, you can find the desired ONU quickly and view the
system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU.

Background

The UNM2000 supports querying ONUs by different ONU attributes. It supports


both fuzzy match and complete match. The ONU query conditions fall into two parts:

u General query conditions: Include the logical domain, type, name, logical ID,
physical ID, OLT IP address, voice service and data service of the ONU.

u Advanced query conditions: Include slot No., ONU No., ONU password, logical
SN password, optical splitter No., optical splitter port No., ONU label and ONU
user information.

The following introduces how to perform the ONU query via setting different query
conditions:

Querying the ONU Object by MAC Address

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Enter the MAC address of the ONU in the Physical Address field.

3. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the MAC address.

128 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Querying the ONU by ONU Data Service

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Enter the IP address of the OLT in the OLT IP field.

3. Set Service Condition to Data and specify the values of CVLAN ID and
SVLAN ID.

4. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the set conditions.

Querying the ONU by ONU Location

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Select the logical domain where the desired ONU resides from the drop-down
list on the right of Logical Domain.

3. Click the Advanced tab in the Set ONU Query Conditions dialog box.

4. Specify Slot Number and ONU Number in the Advanced tab.

5. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the set conditions.

6.4 Authorizing ONUs

You can perform ONU authorization related operations, including configuring the
authentication mode of the PON port or the ONU, authorizing the ONU, replacing
the ONU logical identifier and viewing authorized ONU list.

6.4.1 Configuring the ONU Whitelist

You can query the information of the authorized ONUS and pre-authorize the
unauthorized ONUs. The ONUs in the white list can be authorized and service-
provisioned, while the ONUs not in the whitelist cannot be authorized or services
cannot be provisioned.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

u The settings of the PON port authorization type of the OLT device have been
completed.

Version: B 129
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→ONU Whitelist in the main


menu of the NE manager to open the ONU Authorization View tab, displaying
the information of the authorized ONUs.

2. Modify the ONU whitelist information: Select an entry, double-click Slot No.,
PON No., ONU Type and ONU No. and select the corresponding value from
the drop-down list.

Pre-authorizing the ONU

1. Click in the ONU Authorization View window. In the displayed dialog box,
enter the number of ONUs to be pre-authorized and click OK.

2. Set the parameters for these ONUs to be pre-authorized according to the PON
port authentication mode.

3. Click in the ONU Authorization View window to deliver the pre-


authorization information to the devices.

6.4.2 Managing ONU Authentication Modes

View and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single PON
port, card or device.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

130 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→ONU Authentication Mode in


the main menu of the NE manager GUI.

2. Select the object in the Switch Objects (ONU Authentication Mode) dialog
box that appears, click OK.

3. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Authentication


Mode of this ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the drop-
down list. Table 6-1 describes the authentication modes.

Table 6-1 Description of the ONU Authentication Modes

Authentication Mode Description

Physical address
Authenticates the ONU based on its MAC address.
authentication
Logical SN
authentication: enable
the ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch to set the ONU that is already authenticated
replacement function based on its SN to be authenticated based on its MAC address.
under the logical SN
authentication mode
Logical SN
authentication: disable
the ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch, and the ONU can be authenticated only based
replacement function on its SN. It cannot be authenticated based on its MAC address.
under the logical SN
authentication mode
GPON password
authentication: enable
the ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch to set the ONU that is already authenticated
replacement function based on GPON password to be authenticated based on its MAC
under the GPON address.
password authentication
mode
GPON password
authentication: disable
the ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch, and the ONU can be authenticated only based
replacement function on GPON password. It cannot be authenticated based on its MAC
under the GPON address.
password authentication
mode

Version: B 131
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4. After completing the settings, click to deliver the configuration to device.

6.4.3 Managing PON Port Authentication Modes

You can view and modify the authentication mode of each PON port. After the
authentication mode of the PON port is set, the ONUs under this PON port will be
authenticated adopting the set authentication mode.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→ONU Authentication→


PON Port Authentication Mode to open the ONU Authorization View tab
and view all the PON port authentication modes.

2. To modify the authentication mode of a PON port, double-click the


Authentication Mode of this PON port and select the desired authentication
mode from the drop-down list. Table 6-2 describes the authentication modes.

Table 6-2 Description of PON Port Authentication Modes

Authentication Mode Description

PHYSIC_ID
Authenticates based on the MAC address of the ONU.
AUTHENTICATION
PHYSIC_ID
Authenticates based on the MAC address and password of the
+PASSWORD
ONU.
AUTHENTICATION
PASSWORD
Authenticates based on the password of the ONU.
AUTHENTICATION
SN:LOID+PASSWORD
Authenticates based on the SN or password of the ONU.
AUTHENTICATION
PHYSIC_ID/SN:LOCI
+PASSWORD Authenticates based on the MAC address, SN or password of the
COMBINED ONU.
AUTHENITCATION
NO AUTHENTICATION No authentication is required for the ONU.

SN:LOID
Authenticates based on the SN of the ONU.
AUTHENTICATION

132 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Table 6-2 Description of PON Port Authentication Modes (Continued)

Authentication Mode Description

PHYSIC_ID/SN:LOID
COMBINED Authenticates based on the MAC address or SN of the ONU.
AUTHENTICATION
PHYSIC_ID/PHYSIC
PASSWORD Authenticates based on the MAC address or password of the
COMBINED ONU.
AUTHENTICATION
Note 1: The ONU password and SN have been set before delivery. You can obtain them by
viewing the label attached to the ONU device.

3. After completing the settings, click to deliver the configuration to device.

6.4.4 Replacing the ONU Logical Identifier

When an ONU using the authentication based on logical ID is faulty, you can
replace it with an ONU of the same type. The logical ID of the new ONU is still the
logical ID of the faulty ONU. The services on the original ONU will be downloaded to
the new ONU, and service configuration is not required.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→Replace the ONU Logic ID in


the main menu of the NE manager to open the ONU Authorization View tab.

2. Click and enter the number of rows to be added in the dialog box that
appears. Then click OK.

3. Set the parameters accordingly.

4. After completing the settings, click to deliver the configuration to device.

6.4.5 Viewing the Authorized ONU Information

You can view the authorized ONU information.

Version: B 133
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→ONU Authentication→


Authorized ONU Informationfrom the main menu to display the Switch
Object (Authorized ONU Information) dialog box.

2. Select the card or port and click OK to view the information of the authorized
ONU connected to the card or port. The statuses displayed in the Status
column in the ONU Authorization View tab are described in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 ONU Authorization Status

Status Meaning

Authorized The ONU is connected and the authorization information is sent to the ONU.
The ONU is disconnected and the authorization information is saved in the
Preauthorized
network management database.

Caution:
You can select only one card in the Switch Object (Authorized ONU
Information) dialog box.

Other Operations

Replace the selected object.

1. In the ONU Authorization View tab, click the button.

2. In the displayed Switch Object (Authorized ONU Information) dialog box,


reselect the desired card or PON port and click OK. The ONU Authorization
View tab displays the information of the authorized ONUs corresponding to the
selected object.

6.5 ONU Registration Management

The UNM2000 allows you to query and manage the registration information
(registration failure and times of repeated registration) of the ONUs.

134 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

6.5.1 ONU RMS Error Information Query

You can query the ONU RMS error information to understand the RMS error reason.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→ONU RMS Error Information Query from the main menu.

2. In the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog box, set the query
conditions.

3. Click OK, the ONU RMS Error Information displays the ONU RMS error
reason.

6.5.2 Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs

Through the ONU network interception log, you can check whether multiple ONUs
apply to access the network for the same MAC address. This can help the
maintenance engineers query the network access failure.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→ONU Network Intercept Log Query from the main menu.

2. In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box, set the query
conditions.

3. Click OK. The ONU Network Intercept Log will display the ONUs intercepted
from network.

6.6 Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port

You can set the automatic enabling and disabling time period of the ONU port,
which is convenient for you to remotely manage the time period in which the ONU
port can be used.

Version: B 135
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.6.1 Viewing Rule Tasks

You can view the port enabling rule tasks already set in the system to understand
the object source included in each task, execution result and other related
information.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane
to view the existing tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the task type, execution type, task progress,
task status, execution result and start time of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

6.6.2 Creating a Rule Task

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane or right-click in the
right pane and then select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

136 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

6.6.3 Executing Rule Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the ONU port enabling rule tasks.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane
to view the existing tasks.

3. Right-click the desired rule task and select Execute Now from the shortcut
menu, or click the task and then click the Execute Now button at the bottom of
the tab to execute the ONU port enabling rule task.

Other Operations

Right-click a rule task and select View from the shortcut menu to view the executed
object and execution status in the lower pane.

6.7 Authorizing Cards

Users need to authorize the cards of the equipment.

Version: B 137
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE manager GUI, select Configuration→Set Card


Authentication to display the Set Card Authorization tab to view the
authorization information of cards.

2. Configure the card authorization according to the parameter description in


Table 6-4 and button description in Table 6-5.

Table 6-4 Parameters

Parameter Meaning

EMS Configuration The type of card configured in the UNM2000.

Device Configuration The type of card stored in the device RAM memory.

Actual Configuration The type of card physically inserted into the device.

Table 6-5 Buttons

Button Operation

Set the EMS configuration as the card configuration.

Set the device configuration as the card configuration.

Set the actual configuration as the card configuration.

Add all cards.

Delete all cards.

Hide empty slots.

3. After completing the card authorization, click to deliver the configuration to


the device.

6.8 Synchronizing ONUs Manually

You can manually synchronize the ONU authorization information on the device to
the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

138 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→Manual


ONU Synchronization. The Manually synchronizing the ONU succeeded alert
box appears at the lower right corner, indicating the ONU authorization
information is synchronized to the UNM2000.

6.9 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs

You can obtain the information of the unauthorized ONUs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→Obtain Unauthorized


ONU to display the Switch Object(Unauthorized ONU List) dialog box.

2. Select a desired PON port and click OK. The ONU Authorization View tab
appears, displaying the unauthorized ONUs.

Subsequent Operation

u Click to read the information of unauthorized ONUs from the device.

u Click to open the Switch Object (Unauthorized ONU List) dialog box and
reselect the desired PON port.

u Click , select the range in the Configure the Selection Range dialog box
and click OK to authorize the ONU in the displayed ONU Authorization tab.

6.10 Authorizing ONUs Manually

You can authorize the ONUs manually.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Version: B 139
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→Manual ONU


Authorizationfrom the main menu to display the Manually Authorize ONU
dialog box.

2. Configure the basic information and authentication information, and click Write
Database or Write Equipment or according toTable 6-6 to authorize the ONU
manually.

Table 6-6 Buttons

Button Application

It is applicable to the situation when the ONU is not physically


connected. When the ONU is connected, you can write the
Write database
configuration in the database into the device through Configuration
Synchronization.

Write device It is applicable to the situation when the ONU is physically connected.

6.11 OTDR Link Management

You can set parameters, perform test, view test status and deliver the test command
for the OTDR link via the OTDR link management.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

u The ODMA, ODMB or ODMC card is configured.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→OTDR Link Management from the main menu in the


NE manager GUI to open the OTDR Link Management dialog box.

2. Parameter configuration (taking the Port Mapping Relation as an example).

1) Select Test Config→Port Mapping Relation from the operation tree in the
NE manager.

2) Click and set the added row in the dialog box that appears and click
OK.

140 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

3) Click to save data to database.

3. Execute the manual test.

1) Select Test→Manual Test from the operation tree in the NE manager.

2) Set the test parameters in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

3) After the test is completed, view the test result in Export.

Other Operations

u View test history:

1) Select Test→Test Records from the operation tree in the NE manager.

2) Set the query conditions in the dialog box that appears.

3) View the test history data in the Test Records dialog box.

u Read the connection status of the OTDR card / optical link / remote equipment
from the equipment. The following takes querying optical link status as an
example.

1) Select Test State→Find Optical Link Status from the operation tree in
the NE manager.

2) Click to read the equipment status.

3) View the results in the Find Optical Link Status dialog box.

u Reboot the equipment and cards. The following takes rebooting the remote
equipment as an example.

1) Select Commands→Remote Device Reset from the operation tree in the


NE manager.

2) Set the ODTR slot number and port number in the Remote Device Reset
tab.

3) Click to deliver to the equipment.

Version: B 141
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.12 System Maintenance

This section introduces the operations of NE system maintenance, including system


software upgrade, system software backup, configuration file export, configuration
file import, display card upgrade and ONU upgrade.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The system maintenance operations are similar. The following takes exporting the
system configuration files as an example.

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→System Maintenance→


Export Configuration File to open the Export Configuration File dialog box.

2. Set parameters in the dialog box and click Export Configuration File. After the
Alert box prompts the command is successful, you can view the exported
configuration file in the FTP server customized in the command parameters.

6.13 Upgrading Cards

You can create tasks for the upgrade operations required for OLT system cards
(system cards, service cards, TDM cards, voice cards and OLT firmware) and the
ONU system software and firmware so as to implement automatic upgrade.

Caution:

The upgrade of NE software is risky, which may cause interruption of NE


services. Please upgrade the NE software in strict accordance with the
published upgrade guide of the corresponding NE. It is recommended to
contact the FiberHome Technical Engineer for NE software upgrade.

142 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

6.13.1 System Software Upgrade Task

You can create the system software upgrade task to upgrade the system software of
multiple objects. By selecting the file type of the object source, you can upgrade the
core switch card, IDM software, voice interface card, OLT firmware, time card
software and OTDR card. The following introduces how to view, create and execute
the upgrade task of the system software.

6.13.1.1 Viewing Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to


view the existing upgrade tasks of the system software.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

6.13.1.2 Creating an Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Version: B 143
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click the
right pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the upgrade requirement, and click OK. The new
task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

If the system software upgrade task does not meet the upgrade requirement or is
expired, you can right-click the task to delete, disable, view or modify the attribute.

6.13.1.3 Operation Upgrade Task

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks whose Execution Cycle is One
time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click
Execute Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

144 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to


view the existing upgrade tasks of the system software.

3. Right-click a task that meets the system software upgrade requirement and
select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the system
software upgrade task.

Other Operations

Right-click the executed system upgrade task and select View in the shortcut menu
to view the executed object and execution status in the lower pane.

6.13.2 Tasks of Upgrading ONUs in a Batch Manner

You can select different object sources in the ONU batch upgrade task to upgrade
the CPU / IAD software and firmware of the ONU in a batch manner.

6.13.2.1 Viewing Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing ONU batch upgrade tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Version: B 145
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.13.2.2 Creating an Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the upgrade task requirement, and click OK. The
new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

If the ONU software upgrade task does not meet the upgrade requirement or is
expired, you can right-click the task to delete, disable, view or modify the attribute.

6.13.2.3 Operation Upgrade Task

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks whose Execution Cycle is One
time.

146 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click
Execute Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing ONU batch upgrade tasks.

3. Right-click a task that meets the ONU batch upgrade requirement and select
Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click Execute
Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the ONU batch upgrade
task.

Other Operations

Right-click the executed ONU batch upgrade task and select View from the shortcut
menu to view the executed object and execution status in the lower pane.

6.13.3 Tasks of Upgrading System Cards in a Batch Manner

You can upgrade the service cards of multiple objects in a batch manner via the task
of upgrading the service cards in a batch manner.

Version: B 147
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.13.3.1 Managing Tasks of Upgrading Service Cards in a Batch


Manner

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade of the Service Card in the left pane to
view the existing upgrade task of the system software.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

6.13.3.2 Creating an Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left pane or right-
click the right pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the service card upgrade task requirement, and
click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

148 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

If the service card upgrade task does not meet the upgrade requirement or is
expired, you can right-click the task to delete, disable, view or modify the attribute.

6.13.3.3 Operation Upgrade Task

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks whose Execution Cycle is One
time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click
Execute Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade of the Service Card in the left pane to
view the existing upgrade task of the system software.

3. Right-click a task that meets the requirement on service card batch upgrade
and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the system
software upgrade task.

Version: B 149
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click the executed service card batch upgrade task and select View from the
shortcut menu to view the executed object and execution status in the lower pane.

6.13.4 System Software Upgrade Task

You can upgrade cards and ONUs in a batch manner using the system software
task.

6.13.4.1 Viewing Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to


view the existing upgrade task of the system software.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

6.13.4.2 Creating an Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

150 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

2. Right-click System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the
right pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the system software upgrade task requirement,
and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

If the system software upgrade task does not meet the upgrade requirement or is
expired, you can right-click the task and delete, disable, view or modify the
attribute.

6.13.4.3 Operation Upgrade Task

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to


view the existing upgrade task of the system software.

3. Right-click a task that meet the system software upgrade requirement and
select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the system
software upgrade task.

Version: B 151
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click the executed system upgrade task and select View in the shortcut menu
to view the executed object and execution status in the lower pane.

6.14 Managing Test Tasks

The test task includes the POTS port external / internal line task and the VoIP
pinging test task.

6.14.1 Managing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test


Tasks

Via the task of the POTS port internal / external line test, you can detect whether the
POTS port of the ONU is normal.

6.14.1.1 Viewing Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Test Task→POTS Port Inter & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane to
view the current tasks of POTS port internal / external line test.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

152 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

6.14.1.2 Creating a Test Task

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click POTS Port Inner & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane or right-
click in the right pane and then select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

When the POTS port internal / external line test tasks do not meet the upgrade or
will expire, you can right-click the task to select the operations, such as Delete,
Disable, and viewing and modifying attributes.

6.14.1.3 Executing a Test Task

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: B 153
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Caution:

The execution of the test task will influence the use of services and
therefore it is recommended to execute the test task when service traffic
is at a relatively low volume.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Test Task→POTS Port Inter & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane to
view the current tasks of POTS port internal / external line test.

3. Right-click the desired test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut
menu, or click the task and then click the Execute Now button at the bottom of
the tab to execute the POTS port internal / external test task.

Other Operations

Right-click a test task and select View from the shortcut menu to view the executed
object and execution status in the lower pane.

6.14.2 Managing VOIP PING Tasks

The VoIP PING task can be used to detect the MGC IP address corresponding to
the ONU, helping isolate failures.

6.14.2.1 Viewing Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

154 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

2. Select Test Task→VOIP PING Task to view the existing VOIP PING tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

6.14.2.2 Creating a Task

The VOIP PING test is used to check whether the network management system can
ping the IP address of the MGC related to the ONU. This function is used to isolate
the fault in failure detection.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click VOIP PING Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and
select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required. Table 6-7 describes the Parameter Settings in
the Extend information tab. Then, click OK. The new task will appear in the
task list.

Table 6-7 Description of VOIP PING Parameters

Parameter Description

-n Sends the ECHO data packets with the number specified by COUNT

-w The timeout interval, unit: ms

-l Sends the ECHO data packets with the assigned traffic

-i Sets the TTL field to the assigned value

-v Sets the TOS field to the assigned value

Assigns the number of routes to be passed through in the Recorded Route


-r
field
-s The time stamp of the hop number assigned by the COUNT

-t Pings the object computer continuously

-a Resolutes the address into the NetBios name of the computer

Version: B 155
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 6-7 Description of VOIP PING Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description

If the Not-Section flag is transmitted in a packet, this packet will not be


-f
sectioned by the gateways at the route

-j Sets TTL to the given value

-k Uses the computer list assigned by computer-list to list the route packet

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

When the VOIP PING test tasks do not meet the upgrade requirements or is expired,
you can right-click the task to delete, disable, view or modify the attribute.

6.14.2.3 Running Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Test Task→VOIP PING Task to view the existing VOIP PING tasks.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to
execute the VOIP PING test task.

Other Operations

Right-click a test task and select View from the shortcut menu to view the executed
object and execution status in the lower pane.

156 Version: B
6 Managing Access NEs

6.15 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can set the NE automatic discovery task to automatically discover the NEs in
the specified IP range and then synchronize the NEs to the UNM2000 so as to
automatically create NEs in the UNM2000.

6.15.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can set the NEs which can be discovered automatically within a specified IP
address range as desired.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Resource→Auto NE Discovery or select System→


Policy Task Management→Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task to
view the existing auto NE discovery tasks.

2. Right-click a task, click Attribute from the shortcut menu. You can view the
related information of this task, such as execution cycle, execution time, IP
address range.

Subsequent Operation

u Right-click a corresponding task and select Execute Now, or select the task
and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the NE
auto discovery task.

u Right-click an NE that is discovered automatically in the right pane, and select


Create Selected NE or Create All to automatically save the NE data in the
UNM2000.

Version: B 157
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6.15.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task

When changes are made to IP segments managed by the UNM2000 and new NEs
of devices are added in these IP segment, you can create NE automatic discovery
tasks to enable the UNM2000 to manage the devices in the entire network.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Auto Detect NE Task from the main menu to open the
Auto Detect NE Task dialog box.

2. Click the Create button at the bottom of the tab, or right-click Auto Detect NE
Task in the left pane, or right-click in the right pane and select Create from the
shortcut menu to open Create Auto Detect NE Task dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information and Extend information tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click the desired NE automatic discovery task in the left pane to view the IP
address, NE type and status.

158 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

The alarm is the main information source for knowing about the operating condition
of the equipment and the fault isolation. You need to monitor and handle alarms in a
timely manner, so as to ensure the normal operation of the network.

Basic Concepts

Setting Alarm Related Parameters

Managing Alarm / Event Templates

Synchronizing Alarms

Monitoring Network Alarms

Handling Alarms

Customizing Alarms

Alarm / Event Remote Notification

Managing the Alarm / Event Data

Alarm Logs

Managing Alarm Frequency Analysis Rules

Version: B 159
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

7.1 Basic Concepts

This section introduces the basic concepts related to alarm management, including
alarm browsing, alarm notification mode, alarm level, alarm classification, current
alarm, alarm history, alarm and event, alarm statistics and alarm saving, facilitating
you in alarm processing.

Alarm Browsing

By browsing alarms, the network maintainer can understand the running status of
the network devices and the UNM2000 timely. The alarm browsing operation
includes browsing the current alarms or alarm history of the UNM2000, NEs, cards
and services, as well as synchronizing, verifying and confirming the alarms.

u Browsing alarms: You can browse the alarms of the devices or services in the
UNM2000 to understand the running status of the network or device.

4 Browsing current alarms: Browses the current alarms of all levels of the
entire network.

4 Browsing the alarms of the specified NE: By selecting the device in the
main topology, you can browse the current alarms of the selected device
quickly.

4 Browsing the alarm log: By browsing the alarms which meet the query
condition, you can browse the required alarm information quickly.

u Confirming alarms: If an alarm is confirmed, the alarm is processed. You can


select the desired alarm and confirm it in the current alarm window.

4 Manual confirmation: You can select the desired alarm and confirm it in the
current alarm window.

4 Automatic confirmation: You need to enable the alarm automatic


confirmation function. After an alarm is processed, the UNM2000 will clear
the alarm immediately or at the specified time according to the settings.

u Confirming and clearing alarms: You can select the desired alarm to confirm it
and clear it at the same time in the current alarm window. This alarm will be
saved in the alarm history database.

160 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

u Synchronizing alarms: In case the UNM2000 restores from the communication


interruption with the device or the UNM2000 restarts, you need to synchronize
the alarm to ensure consistent alarms in the UNM2000 and on the device. The
UNM2000 will check whether the alarms in the UNM2000 database and on the
NE device are consistent. If not, the alarms on the NE device will be
synchronized to the UNM2000 database and overwrite the alarms in the
database.

u Checking alarms: Checks whether the current alarm at the UNM2000 side
exists in the current alarms at the NE side. If yes, the alarms at the UNM2000
side keep unchanged. If not, the UNM2000 clears the alarm.

u Refreshing alarms: Obtains the latest alarms from the UNM2000 alarm
database and displays them at the client.

u Clearing alarms: Clears the alarms from the current alarm database of the
UNM2000 and from the NE and saves them to the alarm history database.

u Filtering alarms: You can set the filter conditions to filter the alarm not focused
in the alarm browsing window.

u Alarm remarks: Adds remarks for the alarms already processed, convenient for
alarm management.

Alarm Notification Mode

Obtaining the alarm information timely is very important to alarm processing and
network maintenance. The UNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm notification.

u Alarm indicator color: The UNM2000 uses the changes of the alarm indicator
LEDs to help you quickly locate the alarmed object. By default, the alarm
indicator of the UNM2000 indicates critical alarms in red, major alarms in
orange, minor alarms in yellow and alert alarms in blue. You can customize the
colors of the alarm indicator to indicate alarms of different levels.

u Alarm sound: The UNM2000 client provides the audible and visual alarm when
it is connected to the alarm box device. You can determine the level of the
reported alarm according to the indicator color and sound of the alarm box.
Upon the reporting of a new alarm, the UNM2000 immediately triggers the
alarm box to play the alarm sound and the corresponding alarm indicator
flickers.

Version: B 161
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Remote alarm notification: The UNM2000 provides the following two ways of
remote alarm notification for users who are not on site.

4 Sends alarms via email automatically to the specified users.

4 Sends alarms via SMS automatically to the specified users.

Alarm Level

Alarm levels are used to identify the severity, importance and urgency of the alarms.
The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the following four levels in terms of severity:
critical alarms, major alarms, minor alarms and warning alarms. The alarms of
different levels have different meanings and should be processed differently, as
shown in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Description and Handling Method of Alarms of Different Levels

Alarm Level Meaning Handling Method

Indicates the alarms on the failures that


Critical alarm are global or may cause corruption of Handled urgently.
NEs and services.
Indicates the alarms on the failures of
Major alarm Processed timely.
cards or services in a certain range.

Indicates the alarms on failures of Alarm reason should be found


Minor alarm
general cards or services. timely to eliminate the failure.

Indicates the alarms that may influence


the service quality of devices or
resources other than system
Warning alarm Handled accordingly.
performance and service. Some of them
are just information prompting the
devices are back to normal.

Alarm status

The alarm status includes alarm confirmation and clearance. Different handling
methods should be adopted for alarms in different status. Alarms can be divided into
the following different statuses according to whether the alarm has been confirmed
or cleared.

u Unconfirmed and uncleared

u Confirmed but uncleared

u Unconfirmed but cleared

162 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

u Confirmed and cleared

Alarm Classification

Alarms can be divided into NE alarms and UNM2000 alarms according to their
occurrence locations.

u NE alarms: Indicates the alarms on the failures of NEs.

u UNM2000 alarms: Indicates the alarms on the failures of the UNM2000


environment.

Current Alarm and Alarm History

Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history. Their respective meanings
are as follows:

u Current alarms: Indicates the NE alarms saved in the current alarm database of
the core switch card or the UNM2000 alarms saved in the current alarm
database of the UNM2000.

u Alarm history: Indicates the NE alarms cleared and then saved in the alarm
history database of the core switch card or the UNM2000 alarms confirmed by
users, cleared from the current alarm database and then saved to the alarm
history database.

Alarm Statistics

Alarm statistics indicates gathering the alarm data according to your desired
conditions. The alarm statistics are convenient for you to analyze the running status
of the device.

Alarm Saving

If the alarm history data stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the
UNM2000 operation will be influenced. The alarm data saving function can save the
alarm history data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to
improve the UNM2000 operation performance. The UNM2000 supports manual
saving and overflow saving.

Version: B 163
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Overflow saving: You can set the maximum alarm saving capacity and the
UNM2000 will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history
data reach the preset capacity, the UNM2000 will save the data to a specified
file to decrease its load.

u Save Manually: You can save the alarm history data in the UNM2000 to a
specified file folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving period.
When the alarm history data saved in the database reach the preset time
period, the UNM2000 will save the data to a designated file folder.

Alarm and Event

When detecting the status changes of the managed objects, the UNM2000 presents
them via alarms or events.

u The alarm indicates the notification generated when the system detects a
failure.

u The event indicates any changes occurring on the managed objects.

7.2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters

Set the alarm-related parameters, including the alarm reporting rules, alarm filter
rules, alarm history definition and other local settings.

7.2.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Rules

You can set the alarm reporting rules to automatically report the alarms that you
concern most. These alarms will be automatically reported to the UNM2000 upon
their occurrence. For the unnecessary alarms, you can set not to report them so as
to minimize the influence on the UNM2000 performance caused by a large number
of alarms.

7.2.1.1 Viewing Alarm Reporting Rules

You can view whether the existing alarm reporting rules meet the requirements for
current network maintenance.

164 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingAlarm Reporting Settings from the main menu to


display the Alarm Reporting Setting tab.

2. Select Report Rule in the left pane, and view the existing reporting rules in the
right pane.

3. Click before Report Rule, select the corresponding alarm reporting rule, and
then view the related information of the rule in the right pane.

7.2.1.2 Setting Alarm Reporting Rules

When the existing alarm reporting rules cannot meet the requirements for device
maintenance, you can create alarm reporting rules as described below.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The desired alarm reporting rule has been planned according to the
maintenance requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingAlarm Reporting Settings from the main menu to


display the Alarm Reporting Setting tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Alarm Report
Rule dialog box.

No. Access Method


1 Click Report Rule in the left pane, and click Create in the right pane.

Select Report Rule in the left pane, right-click in the blank area in the right pane
2
and select Create from the shortcut menu.
3 Right-click Report Rule in the left pane and select Create from the shortcut menu.

Version: B 165
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. In the Create Alarm Report Rule dialog box, set the alarm reporting rules as
required.

Note:

u Click Copy from Other Rule, select the reporting rules in the Select
the Report Rule dialog box, and copy the related information of the
selected reporting rule. This can improve the setting efficiency.

u If the continuous reporting mode is enabled, the alarms meeting the


reporting rules will be reported again after the set time interval
expires.

4. Click OK.

Other Operations

Right-click the alarm reporting rule entry in the right pane and select the Delete,
Refresh, Enable / Disable, Print, Copy Cell or Export operation.

7.2.2 Managing Alarm Filter Rules

The alarm filter rules are used to filter some NE alarms so that you can focus on
important alarms, improving the failure solving efficiency. After the alarm filter rules
are set, the filtered alarms will neither be saved into the alarm database nor be
displayed.

7.2.2.1 Setting the Project Alarm Filtering

During the project installation, commissioning, cutover and maintenance, massive


alarms may occur, which will distract maintainers from significant alarms. You can
automatically filter all the reported alarms and alarm clearance information during
the project construction by setting the project alarm filtering. The filtered alarms are
neither saved in the database nor displayed in the client terminal.

166 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Shield Project Alarms in the main menu to open the Shield
Project Alarms tab.

2. Click the Added Filtered NE of Project Alarm at the lower right corner of the
tab or right-click in the blank area of the tab to select Added Filtered NE of
Project Alarm.

3. In the Please select the need to generate masking rules NE dialog box,
select the NE object to set to the project construction status, and click OK.

4. Refer to Table 7-2 to set the relevant project alarm filtering parameters.

Table 7-2 Parameter Descriptions of Project Alarm Filtering

Parameter Description

The start time of filtering the alarms of the selected NE object; the default
Start Time
time is the current system time.

Select this item and the filtering end time will become valid, otherwise the
Auto Stopped
End Time is unavailable.
After the end time has expired, the alarm filtering of the selected NE will
End Time
be stopped. The default value is the current time plus 24 hours.

The alarm filtering of the selected NE will be stopped as soon as this


End Now
option is selected.

5. After completing the settings, click Save All at the lower right corner of the tab,
or simply right-click the blank area in the tab and select Save All to save the
project alarm filtering settings.

Other Operations

Delete the project alarm filtering.

1. Select the project alarm filter entry, and select Delete at the lower right corner
of the tab, or simply right-click the project alarm filter entry to select Delete.

2. In the displayed Confirm to Delete alert box, click Yes.

Version: B 167
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

7.2.2.2 Viewing Alarm Filter Rules

You can view whether the existing alarm filter rules meet the maintenance
requirements of the UNM2000 and the NE.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Shield Rule Management from the main


menu to open the Alarm Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Select View Current Alarm Shield Rule in the left pane, and view the existing
current alarm shield rules in the right pane.

3. Click before Current Alarm Shield Rule, select the corresponding alarm filter
rule, and view the related information of the rule in the right pane.

7.2.2.3 Setting Alarm Filter Rules

When the existing alarm filter rules cannot meet the management and maintenance
requirements of the UNM2000 and NEs, you can create alarm filter rules as
described below.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Shield Rule Management from the main


menu to open the Alarm Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Alarm Report
Rule dialog box.

168 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

No. Access Method


Click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane and click Create in the right
1
pane.

Click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane
2
and select Create from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane and select Create from
3
the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Current Alarm Shield Rule dialog box, set the alarm filter rule
according to the planning.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Rule to open the Select Shield Rule dialog box
and select the desired filter rule to copy its rule settings. This can improve
the setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

Other Operations

Right-click the alarm reporting rule entry in the right pane and select the Delete,
Refresh, Enable / Disable, Print, Copy Cell or Export operation.

7.2.2.4 Setting Northbound Interface Filter Rules

When some alarms need not be reported to the third-party EMS through the
northbound interface, you can set northbound interface alarm filter rules to fitter
these alarms so as to improve the alarm processing efficiency.

Background Information

u The filter rules do not apply to the alarms already reported. They are only
applicable to the matching alarms reported after the filter rules are set.

u The filtered alarms will not be reported to the northbound interface.

Version: B 169
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingNorthbound Interface Shield Rule Management from


the main menu to open the Northbound Interface File Rule Management tab.

2. Click Create Rule.

3. In the displayed Northbound Interface Filter Rule dialog box, set the filter
rules.

4. Click OK to add a northbound interface alarm filter rule and filter the current
alarm in specific condition. You can view the added northbound interface alarm
filter rule in the Northbound Interface File Rule Management tab.

Other Operations

In the Filter Rule of North tab, right-click a northbound interface alarm rule and
select the menus from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operations,
including Modify Rule, Delete Rule, Disable Rule, Copy Rule, etc.

7.2.2.5 Setting Alarm Flashing Rules

When some alarms need not be reported, you can set alarm flashing rules to fitter
these alarms so as to improve the alarm processing efficiency.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management from the


main menu to open the Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Click Vibration in the left pane.

3. Click Create to create a rule.

4. In the Create Current Alarm Vibration Shield Rule dialog box, set the alarm
filter rule.

5. Click OK to add an alarm filter rule and filter the current alarm in specific
condition. The newly added alarm filter rules can be viewed in the Alarm
Vibration Shield Rule Management tab.

170 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Other Operations

In the Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management tab, right-click an alarm filter rule
and select the operations, such as Delete and Copy.

7.2.3 Setting the Audible Alarms

You can set different sounds for alarms of different levels and set the play priority of
the alarm sounds. When an alarm occurs, the loudspeaker on the computer running
the client will play the corresponding sound to notify of the reported alarm of the
specific level.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→Alarm Sound in the left pane to open


the dialog box.

Version: B 171
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

7.2.4 Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm

The following introduces how to enable / disable the audio alarm. This operation is
only valid to the current client end. The UNM2000 client will play different alarm
sounds for alarms of different levels upon their occurrence in the UNM2000 or NE.
You can select whether to enable the audio alarm in the UNM2000.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

u Disable the audio alarm.

Click to change it to .

u Enable the audio alarm.

Click to change it to .

Note:

For other setting items related to the audio alarm, see Setting the Audible
Alarms.

7.2.5 Setting the Display Modes of New Alarms / Events

You can set the display modes of new alarms / events as required.

172 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→New Alarm / Event in the left pane to


open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

7.2.6 Setting the Alarm Color

You can set different colors for alarms of different levels, which is convenient for you
to browse the focused alarms.

Version: B 173
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Background Information

u After the colors corresponding to alarms of different levels are set, the alarm
icons in the topology view, alarm entries queried and alarm indicators on the
alarm bulletin board will appear in the set colors.

u The UNM2000 provides four colors corresponding to four alarm levels. Critical
alarms: ; major alarms: ; minor alarms: ; prompt alarms:
above the list.

u The GUI display settings are applicable to all users at any client.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings→Alarm Settings→Local Alarm→


Alarm Color dialog box.

2. In the Set a Color for the Alarm Level combo box, click on the right to
select the desired color for each alarm level.

3. In the Set the Background Color of the List Corresponding to the Alarm
combo box, click on the right to select the desired colors for different
confirmation statuses.

4. Click Apply→OK to apply the settings.

7.2.7 Setting Other Items of the Local Alarms

Other local alarm settings include the alarm monitoring template, maximum number
of startup templates as well as whether to enable alarm automatic reporting upon
client startup.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→Others in the left pane to open the


dialog box.

174 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

4. Select Alarm→Alarm Query Template Management from the main menu to


view the parameters already set.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

7.2.8 Setting the Definition of the Alarm History

You can set the delay for switching current alarms to the alarm history as required.

Background Information

When the current alarms have been confirmed and cleared, they will be switched to
the alarm history after the set delay time.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Alarm History Definition in the


left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Set the delay for switching current alarms to the alarm history and then click
Apply to apply the settings.

7.2.9 Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules

For convenient maintenance, the UNM2000 provides the automatic confirmation by


alarm level or by rule for the unconfirmed but cleared alarms. You can set the
automatic confirmation rules for the cleared alarms.

Version: B 175
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Auto Confirm in the left pane to


open the dialog box.

3. Click Add to open the dialog box.

4. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Confirming Condition, Alarm


Source and Alarm Source and Alarm Source Type tabs respectively. Then
click OK to create an automatic confirmation rule.

5. Return to the Auto Confirm dialog box, and click Apply to make the settings
valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default


values.

176 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

7.2.10 Converting Events to Alarms

You can change the events into alarms by adding or deleting events in a batch
manner. The UNM2000 will process the alarms transformed from events as alarms.

Prerequisite

The authority of the Event to Alarm Settings function is configured in the authority
and domain division management. Only the user who has the corresponding
authority can perform this function.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingEvent to Alarm Settings from the UNM2000 main


menu.

2. In the Event to Alarm Settings tab, select the desired event entries.

3. Click Save.

7.2.11 Customizing Alarms

Through custom alarm settings, the UNM2000 can display different types of alarms
based on how much users pay attention to these alarms or how users find these
alarms. In this way, the maintenance engineers can better monitor the equipment,
and quickly isolate the failure and solve the problems.

7.2.11.1 Viewing Custom Special Alarms

This function helps you understand the defined special alarm types.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

Version: B 177
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the


left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Click the Custom Special Alarms tab to view the special alarms already
defined.

178 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

7.2.11.2 Customizing Special Alarms

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the


left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Click the Custom Special Alarms tab.

4. Click Create, select the NE type, alarm name, and special alarm name in the
Custom Special Alarms dialog box, and then click OK.

5. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Subsequent Operation

Select the useless custom special alarms, and click Delete to delete them.

7.2.11.3 Setting Special Alarm Icons

Background Information

By setting the special alarm icons, you can view the special alarm icon at the upper-
right corner of the NE icon when the corresponding alarm occurs at the NE, so as to
obtain the alarm information in a timely manner.

u When multiple alarms occur at the NE, the special icon of the alarm with the
highest priority will be displayed at the upper-right corner of the NE icon.

u The priority of an alarm ranges from 1 to 22, with 22 being the highest.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: B 179
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the


left pane to open the dialog box.

3. In the Special Alarm Icon Display tab, and select Enable, Hide after
Confirmation or Hide after Clearing as required.

4 If Enable is selected, the special icon of this alarm appears at the upper-
right corner of the NE icon upon the occurrence of the alarm.

Note:

For enabling the custom alarms, see Customizing Special Alarms.

4 If Hide after confirmation is selected, after the corresponding alarm is


confirmed, the special icon of this alarm at the upper-right corner of the NE
will be hidden.

4 If Hide after Clearing is selected, after the corresponding alarm is cleared,


the special icon of this alarm at the upper-right corner of the NE will be
hidden.

180 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

7.3 Managing Alarm / Event Templates

The UNM2000 supports setting the alarm / event query conditions or statistical
conditions as templates. You can use the predefined alarm / event template to
quickly set the filter conditions and attributes of alarms / events.

7.3.1 Alarm Template

The alarm template is used to save the alarm query / statistical conditions. The
alarm template simplifies the setting operation and enables you to quickly complete
the settings of the alarm browsing and alarm attributes.

The UNM2000 allows you to set the alarm templates for different objects, such as
network blocks, NEs, and cards..

The alarm templates include the following types:

u Current alarm query template

u Alarm history query template

u Alarm log query template

u Current alarm log statistical template

u Alarm history log statistical template

u Alarm filter template

The following introduces how to view, add, delete and modify various alarm
templates.

7.3.1.1 Viewing Alarm Templates

You can view the alarm template already set and saved. If the current alarm
template meets your requirements for querying alarms, you can use the template
directory without the need to set the conditions.

Version: B 181
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Select Alarm Profile in the left pane of the Alarm Query Template
Management tab, and view the quantity and attributes of various preset
templates in the right pane.

3. Click the desired alarm template type and select the specific number of this
type of template to view the details.

7.3.1.2 Creating an Alarm Template

You can save the commonly used alarm query / statistical conditions as a template
so that you can directly use the template next time for the same query or statistics,
without the need to set the conditions again.

Note:

The following uses the current alarm query template as an example. You
can follow the same procedures to add other templates with the only
difference in the access method.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Current Alarm
Template dialog box.

182 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

No. Access Method


Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, and click Create
1
Current Alarm Template in the right pane.

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the right
2
pane and select Create Current Alarm Template from the shortcut menu.

Right-click Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane and select Create
3
Current Alarm Template from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the alarm query conditions in the Create Current Alarm Template dialog
box as needed.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Template, select the alarm profile in the Select
Template dialog box, and copy the related information of the selected
alarm profile. This can improve the setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, select the corresponding
entry in the right pane and click the corresponding button at the bottom, or right-click
the desired entry to perform the operations, such as Delete, Refresh, Print, Copy
Cell or Export from the shortcut menu.

7.3.1.3 Modifying an Alarm Template

When setting the alarm template, you can modify the settings in case the query
condition setting error occurs.

Note:

The following uses the current alarm query template as an example. You
can follow the same procedures to modify other templates with the only
difference in the access method.

Version: B 183
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Select Alarm Profile in the left pane of the Alarm Query Template
Management tab, and view the quantity and attributes of various preset
templates in the right pane.

3. Click the desired alarm template type and select the specific number of this
type of template to view the details.

4. Modify the relevant information of the alarm template in the right pane and click
Apply.

7.3.1.4 Setting the Template Attributes

At the UNM2000 client, you can set the alarm template as a monitoring template,
startup template or default template to facilitate monitoring, querying or gathering
statistics of alarms.

Background Information

u Default template: When you query or gather statistics of the alarms via the
menu, the UNM2000 will use this template to open the tab of the corresponding
functions. Only one default template can be set for a type of alarm templates.

u Monitoring profile: The Alarm Statistics dialog box in the toolbar of the
UNM2000 client will display the alarm statistics according to this template. The
monitoring template needs to be a current alarm template. You can set five
monitoring templates at most.

184 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Note:

After the monitoring template is set to the current template in the Alarm
Statistics dialog box, the four indicators (in different colors) on the
toolbar will display the statistics data of alarms with various levels
according to the current template.

u Monitoring profile: The Alarm Statistics dialog box in the toolbar of the
UNM2000 client will display the alarm statistics according to this template. The
monitoring template need to be a current alarm template. You can set five
monitoring templates at most.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Set the alarm template attribute, that is, set the alarm profile to be a monitoring
template or startup template.

4 Set the alarm template as a monitoring template.

a) In the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management tab,


select Monitor Template Management.

b) Right-click in the blank area of the right pane and select Select, or
click the Select button at the lower-right corner.

c) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding alarm


and click OK to set the template as a monitoring template.

d) Select a monitoring template and click Delete Template Settings, or


right-click the monitoring template and select Delete Template
Settings to undo setting the alarm template as a monitoring template.

4 Set the alarm template as a startup template.

a) In the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management tab,


select Startup Template Management.

Version: B 185
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

b) Right-click in the blank area of the right pane and select Select, or
click the Select button at the lower-right corner.

c) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding alarm


and click OK to set the template as a startup template.

d) Select the starting template and click Delete Template Settings, or


right-click the startup template and select Delete Template Settings
to undo setting the alarm template as a startup template.

7.3.2 Event Template

The event template simplifies the setting operation and enables you to quickly
complete the settings of the event browsing. The event template is used to save the
event query or statistical conditions.

The UNM2000 allows you to set the event templates for different objects, such as
network blocks, NEs, and cards. Monitoring and managing events can ensure the
normal operation of the network.

7.3.2.1 Viewing Event Templates

Save the frequently used event query conditions into a template, so as to use the
template for quick query in the future.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event
Query Template tab.

2. Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane to view the existing event
query templates.

3. Click the desired event template type and select the specific number of
template entries of this type to view the details.

7.3.2.2 Creating an Event Template

Save the frequently used event query conditions into a template, so as to use the
template for quick query in the future.

186 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event
Query Template tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the New Event Query
Template dialog box.

No. Access Method


Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane and click Create
1
Event Query Template in the right pane.

Right-click Event Report Query Template in the left pane and select
2
Create Event Query Template from the shortcut menu.

Click Create Event Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the
3 right pane and select Create Event Query Template from the shortcut
menu.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic Information, Filter Info, and Event Source
tabs as required, and click OK. Then the new event query template will be
displayed in the template list.

Note:

Click Select Template, and you can copy all settings except Template
Name from other templates. This can improve the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

Right-click the corresponding query template, and select operations such as Copy,
Delete, Refresh, Set as Default Template / Cancel Default Template, Print, Copy
Cell or Export.

Note:

The default profile (All Object) of the system cannot be copied, deleted,
and modified.

Version: B 187
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

7.3.2.3 Modifying an Event Template

When setting the event template, you can modify the event query template settings
in case the query condition setting error occurs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event
Query Template tab.

2. Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane to view the existing event
query templates.

3. Click the event reporting query template to view the detailed settings of the
template.

4. Modify the event query reporting template in the right pane and click Save All.

7.4 Synchronizing Alarms

Synchronizing alarms includes synchronizing the current alarms of NEs and the
UNM2000. With this function, you can synchronize the alarms at the NE side with
those at the UNM2000 side and synchronize the current alarms of the UNM2000
with the alarms in the alarm database of the UNM2000. The UNM2000 supports
manual alarm synchronization.

7.4.1 Synchronizing Alarms Manually

In case of network interruption, the alarms at the UNM2000 side may be


inconsistent with those at the NE side. To actually reflect the alarm data of the NEs,
you can synchronize the alarms of the selected NEs to the UNM2000 so as to
ensure the alarm data at the UNM2000 and at the NE side are consistent.

188 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Background Information

Generally, the UNM2000 will automatically synchronize the alarm data at the NE
side with those at the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Right-click the object in the main topology and select Open NE Manager from
the shortcut menu to access the NE Manager GUI.

2. Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select Manual
Alarm Synchronization from the shortcut menu. Then click Close in the
displayed alert box. The manual alarm synchronization is completed.

7.5 Monitoring Network Alarms

By monitoring the network alarms, you can know the operating status of the network
in a timely manner.

The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the current alarms and the alarm history
according to the alarm statuses.

u Current alarm: the alarm data saved in the current alarm database of the
UNM2000.

The alarm frequently generated by the same object will be displayed as one
entry in the current alarm list. You can view the alarm log to query all the alarm
records.

u Alarm history: the current alarms that have been cleared and those confirmed
and cleared will be added into the alarm history after a preset period.

The alarm history will be saved into the alarm history database from the current
alarm database. See Setting the Definition of the Alarm History regarding how
to set the delay time for transferring the current alarms to the alarm history.

7.5.1 Viewing current alarms

You can view the current alarms of the entire network or a certain object, so as to
analyze the alarm information and perform the troubleshooting.

Version: B 189
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select one of the access methods in Table 7-3 to open the Query Current
Alarm dialog box.

Table 7-3 Access Methods for Viewing Current Alarms

Operation Access Method


Select Alarm→Current Alarm from the main menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane, and select Current
Alarm from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the topology view, and select Current
Alarm from the shortcut menu.
Viewing In the NE manager window, select Alarm→Current Alarm from the main
current alarms menu.
In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card or port, and select Current Alarm from the shortcut
menu.
In the Diagram pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card, and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.

2. Querying Current Alarms

4 Query current alarms by alarm template.

Note:

If the current alarm query template is set, the system collects the current
alarms according to the query conditions set in the template. For setting
the alarm template, see Alarm Template.

a) In the Current Alarm tab, click Query by Template. The current


alarm tab displays the alarms queried by the template.

4 Set the query condition to view the current alarms.

a) In the Current Alarm tab, click Query. The Query Current Alarm
window appears.

b) Set the query conditions in the Basic Information, Alarm Source


and Advanced Information tabs as needed.

190 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Current alarm query dialog box,
you can click Save as template to save the query conditions as a profile.
When needing to query according to the same conditions, you can select
this profile directly, without repeated settings.

c) After completing the settings, click OK to view the current alarms


meeting the conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper left corner of the Current Alarm tab to
perform the following operations.

4 Click to set whether to automatically report updated alarms.

4 Click to set whether the system automatically scrolls the alarm display
table when the alarms are reported.

4 Click to select the corresponding template for query.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the critical
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the major
alarms.

Version: B 191
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the minor
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the prompt
alarms.

u Click the buttons at the bottom-right corner of the Current Alarm tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected
alarm.

4 Select an alarm and click Confirm Alarm. The Confirmation Status of


the alarm becomes User Confirmation.

4 Select an alarm and click Clear Alarm. The Clear Status of the alarm
becomes User Clearance.

7.5.2 Viewing Alarm History

You can view the alarm history of a certain object or all objects in the entire network
to understand the alarms occurred so as to facilitate failure analysis.

Background Information

u The alarms already confirmed and cleared are categorized into the alarm
history while the alarms in other status are categorized as the current alarms.

u When the number of alarms exceeds the default threshold preset, only the
latest alarm history will be displayed and the earlier alarm history will not be
displayed. To view the earlier alarm history, you can set the filter condition to
query.

Procedure

1. Select one of the access methods in Table 7-4 to open the Alarm History
Query dialog box.

Table 7-4 Access Methods for Viewing the Alarm History

Operation Access Method


Viewing Alarm In the Diagram pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
History corresponding card and select Alarm History from the shortcut menu.

192 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Table 7-4 Access Methods for Viewing the Alarm History (Continued)

Operation Access Method


Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select Alarm
History from the shortcut menu.

Right-click the corresponding NE in the topology view and select Alarm


History from the shortcut menu.

Select Alarm→Alarm History from the main menu in the NE manager


window.
In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card or port and select Alarm History from the shortcut menu.

Select Alarm→Alarm History from the main menu.

2. Viewing Alarm History

4 View the alarm history by alarm template.

Note:

If the alarm history query template is set, the system collects the alarm
history according to the query conditions set in the template. For setting
the alarm template, see Alarm Template.

a) In the Alarm History tab, click Query by Template. The alarm history
tab displays the alarms queried by the template.

4 Set the query conditions to view the alarm history.

a) In the Alarm History tab, click Query to bring up the Alarm History
Query window.

b) Set the query conditions in the Basic Information, Alarm Source


and Advanced Information tabs as needed.

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box,
you can click Save as template to save the query conditions as a profile.
When needing to query according to the same conditions, you can select
this profile directly, without repeated settings.

Version: B 193
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

c) After completing the settings, click OK to view the alarm history


meeting the set conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Perform operations by clicking shortcut icons. Click the shortcut icons at the
upper left corner to perform the following operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to set whether the alarm history window displays only the critical
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the alarm history window displays only the major
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the alarm history window displays only the minor
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the alarm history window displays only the prompt
alarms.

u Perform operations by clicking buttons. Click the buttons at the lower right
corner of the tab to perform the following operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected
alarm.

4 Click Refresh to refresh the alarms.

194 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

4 Right-click an alarm, and you can perform the following operations via the
shortcut menu: isolating, refreshing, and exporting, etc. For operations
related to alarm handling, see Handling Alarms.

7.5.3 Viewing Related Alarms

You can view the NE alarms to understand the running status of the NE.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm History tab according to Viewing current
alarms and Viewing Alarm History.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select View Current Alarm of


Attributed NE / View NE Alarm History to view the current alarm / alarm
history of the NE corresponding to the alarm.

7.5.4 Viewing Alarm Details

By viewing the alarm details, you can obtain the alarm name, alarm reason,
processing suggestion and location.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm History tab according to Viewing the
Current Alarms and Viewing Alarm History.

2. Select an alarm and click View Details in the lower right corner to view the
details of the selected alarm.

Version: B 195
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Right-click the alarm and select View Detail to view the alarm details in text.
You can click Copy to copy the alarm details to the clipboard.

Subsequent Operation

You can process the alarms according to the processing suggestions in the
Maintenance Experience.

196 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

7.5.5 View alarm logs.

You can query the log information for the alarms of the entire network or the
selected object via viewing the alarm logs.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Query Alarm Log from the main menu to open
the Query Alarm Logs dialog box.

2. View alarm logs.

4 Query the alarm logs by log template.

Note:

If the default log query template is set, the system collects the alarm logs
according to the query conditions set in the template. For setting the
alarm template, see Creating an Alarm Template.

a) In the Query Alarm Logs tab, click Select Template.

b) In the displayed Select Template window, select the desired template


and click OK.

c) In the Query Alarm Logs tab, click OK. The Alarm Log tab displays
the alarm logs matching the conditions preset in the template.

4 Set the query condition to view alarm logs.

a) Set the query conditions in the Query Alarm Logs dialog box.

b) Click OK to view the alarm logs meeting the conditions.

Version: B 197
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm log query dialog box, you
can click Save as template to save the query conditions as a profile.
When querying according to the same conditions, you can select this
profile directly, without repeated settings.

Subsequent Operation

You can also perform the following operations as required after completing the
alarm log query information.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Alarm Log tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of critical alarms only in the Alarm
Log tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of major alarms only in the Alarm
Log tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of minor alarms only in the Alarm
Log tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of prompt alarms only in the Alarm
Log tab.

u Click the buttons at the bottom-right corner of the Alarm Log tab to perform the
corresponding operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected
alarm. For specific information, see Viewing Alarm Details.

4 Click Refresh to refresh the alarms.

4 Click Query by the Template to select another template for query.

4 Click Query to open the Query Alarm Logs dialog box. Then reset the
query condition for query.

198 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

u Select the shortcut menus. Right-click an alarm and select the corresponding
shortcut menu to confirm, clear or locate the alarm. For operations related to
alarm handling, see Handling Alarms.

7.5.6 Viewing the Alarm Log Statistics

You can set the statistics conditions for the statistics of alarm logs.

Procedure

The procedures of gathering the alarm log statistics are similar. The following takes
gathering the current alarm log statistics as an example.

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Gather Current Alarm Log Statistics from the


main menu to open the Query Alarm Log Statistics dialog box.

Note:

If the default alarm log statistics profile has been set, the system will
query according to the default profile. For the operations of setting the
default alarm query profile, see Alarm Template.

2. Set the statistics conditions in the Alarm log statistics query dialog box, and
then click OK.

Version: B 199
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm log statistics query
dialog box, you can click Save as template to save the query conditions
as a profile. When querying according to the same conditions, you can
select this profile directly, without repeated settings.

3. After completing the settings, click OK to view the statistics information of alarm
logs meeting the set conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Alarm Log Statistics tab
to perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a table.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a chart. You can select
different display and output modes through different operation buttons.

¡ Click to print the current page.

¡ Click to export the current page as an image.

¡ Click to select the alarm levels displayed on the current page.

200 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

¡ Click to select the time point displayed in the chart of the list that
appears.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a curve chart.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a bar chart.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a pie chart.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a curve comparison chart.

7.5.7 Viewing Alarm Statistics

The following introduces how to view the alarm statistics through the alarm panel.

Procedure

1. Click on the shortcut toolbar of the main menu to open the Alarm
Statistics dialog box.

Note:

In the Alarm Statistics dialog box, the statistics are displayed in the way
you have selected.

Subsequent Operation

u Select Table Display.

Click the Table Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring template
and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm statistical
information is displayed in a table.

Version: B 201
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Select Flashing Alarm Indicator LED to flicker the corresponding LED


automatically on the toolbar when an alarm occurs.

4 Click the Select Template or right-click in the table display area to select
Select Template. In the displayed Select Template dialog box, select the
corresponding template and view its statistical information.

4 Select the corresponding row in the table and click Cancel Statistics or
right-click the row and select Cancel Statistics to cancel calculating the
alarm information.

4 Select the corresponding row in the table and click Set to Current or right-
click the row and select Set to Current. After setting the selected template
as the current one, the four-color alarm indicator LEDs on the toolbar will
display the corresponding information of the current template.

4 Right-click in the table display area to select Alarm Query Template to


open the Alarm Query Template Management tab. Then add, delete or
modify the alarm query template as needed. For details, see Alarm
Template.

u Select Bar Chart Display.

Click the Bar Chart Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring
template and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm
statistical information is displayed in a bar chart.

202 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

u Select Pie Chart Display.

Click the Pie Chart Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring
template and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm
statistical information is displayed in a pie chart.

Version: B 203
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

7.5.8 Querying Reported Events

By querying the reported events, you can obtain the running status of the system.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Query Reported Events from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Query Reported Events dialog box that
appears and click OK.

Note:

u If the default template has been set, the system will query according
to the default template.

u You can click Copy from Template in the Query Reported Events
dialog box to select an existing template for query.

u After setting the query conditions, you can click Save as Template
to save the current query conditions as a template.

204 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

3. In the Query Reported Events tab, view the query results.

Subsequent Operation

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Query Reported Events
tab to perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to set whether to automatically report updated alarms.

4 Click to set whether the system automatically scrolls the alarm display
table when the alarms are reported.

4 Click to select the corresponding template for query.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the critical
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the major
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the minor
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the
warning alarms.

u Click the buttons at the bottom of the Query Reported Events tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Click Query to reset the query conditions in the Query Reported Events
dialog box and then click OK.

Version: B 205
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Click Query by Template, select the desired template in the Select


Template dialog box and then click OK.

4 Select an event entry and click View Details to view the detailed
information of the selected event.

u Right-click the event entry in the Query Reported Events tab and select the
shortcut menu items to perform the corresponding operations.

u Select Topology Location to locate the source NE that triggered the event in
the topology view so as to ascertain the physical position of the corresponding
NE in the network.

u Select View Event Report of the NE to filter the events corresponding to the
NE so as to analyze the running status of the NE.

u Select Remark to type the remark information of the selected event.

u Select Copy Cell to copy the information in the selected table cell to the
clipboard.

u Select Print to print the event logs.

u Select Export→Export All Records to export all reported events in format of


TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML to the specified directory.

u Select Export→Export Select Record to export the selected events in format


of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML to the specified directory.

7.5.9 Viewing Reported Alarms

This section introduces how to view the reported alarms.

Prerequisite

The alarm reporting rules have been set and enabled.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→View the Reported Alarms from the main menu.

2. In the View Reported Alarm tab, view the information on the alarms meeting
the reporting conditions.

206 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Note:

For the related operations of the buttons, shortcut icons, and shortcut
menus in the View Reported Alarm tab, see Viewing current alarms.

3. Click Report Setting at the bottom-right part of the tab, and access the Alarm
Report Setting tab to re-configure the alarm reporting rules.

4. Click Clear All Records at the bottom-right part of the tab to clear all the
records in the current tab. Then the tab will display the alarm information
reported after the records are cleared.

7.6 Handling Alarms

When an alarm occurs, you should handle the alarm following certain procedures to
eliminate the fault, including viewing the detailed alarm information, isolating the
alarm, confirming the alarm and clearing the alarm.

7.6.1 Confirming Alarms

The UNM2000 supports manual alarm confirmation and automatic confirmation of


the cleared alarms. The manual alarm confirmation indicates that the alarm has
been processed by a user.

Procedure

u Confirm alarms manually.

Version: B 207
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

1) See Viewing current alarms or View alarm logs. for opening the Current
Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2) Confirm the alarms via one of the following ways:

¡ Select the corresponding alarm and click Confirm Alarm in the lower
right part of the tab.

¡ Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm Alarm.

¡ Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm and Mark the
Alarms.

After manual alarm confirmation, the Confirmation Status of the


corresponding alarm will turn to User Confirmation.

u Confirming alarms automatically

See Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules for setting the automatic
confirmation rules of the cleared alarms.

By default, the system clears the alarms one day after their occurrence time at
00:00 automatically and the Confirmation Status of the alarms will change to
Auto Confirm.

Note:

If any alarm is to be re-focused, you can right-click this alarm and select
Unconfirm the Alarm. The Confirmation Status of this alarm will
subsequently change to Unconfirmed.

7.6.2 Clearing Alarms Manually

When the device failures are eliminated, the alarms will be cleared automatically. If
the alarms cannot be cleared automatically, you can remove them manually.

Procedure

1. See Viewing current alarms or View alarm logs. for opening the Current Alarm
or Alarm Log tab.

208 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Clear Alarm, or click Clear
Alarm at the lower right corner of the tab. The Clear Status of the
corresponding alarm changes to User Clearance.

7.6.3 Confirming and Clearing Alarms

When a device is faulty, you can confirm and clear alarms with one click.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings→Alarm Settings→Server Settings→


Alarm Basic Setting from the main menu.

2. In the Alarm Basic Setting dialog box, select Show Confirming and Clearing
Alarm Function.

3. See Viewing current alarms or View alarm logs. for opening the Current Alarm
or Alarm Log tab.

4. Select the corresponding alarm and click Confirm Alarm in the lower right part
of the tab or right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm and Clear
Alarm.

7.6.4 Locating Alarms

This function enables you to locate the topological object, ONU list, card or port that
generates this alarm.

Procedure

1. Refer to Viewing current alarms, Viewing Alarm History or View alarm logs. to
open the Current Alarm, Alarm History or Alarm Log tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Topology Location / Locate to


Card or Port / Locate to ONU List.

Version: B 209
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

7.6.5 Shielding Alarms

The following introduces how to shield a certain alarm in the current alarm query
GUI. When some alarms do not need to be handled, you can filter these alarms.

Background Information

u The filter rules do not apply to the alarms already reported. They are only
applicable to the matching alarms reported after the filter rules are set.

u The filtered alarms are neither in the alarm database nor displayed.

Procedure

1. See Viewing current alarms for opening the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Filter.

3. In the Filter Alarm dialog box, set the filter rules.

4. Click OK to add an alarm filter rule and filter the current alarm in specific
condition.

Note:

u The newly added alarm filter rules can be viewed in the Alarm
Shield Rule Management tab.

u To cancel the alarm filter settings, clear the Enable option or delete
the corresponding filter rules. See Viewing Alarm Filter Rules.

210 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

7.6.6 Modifying Alarm Levels

You can set the alarm level for the UNM2000 alarms to improve the alarm
monitoring efficiency.

Procedure

1. See Viewing current alarms for opening the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Modify the Level.

3. In the Modify Alarm Level dialog box, set the parameters in Modify Range
and Modify the Level to.

4. Click OK.

7.6.7 Editing Alarm Remarks

You can edit the alarm remarks to record additional information about the alarm for
maintenance.

Procedure

1. See Viewing current alarms for opening the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Modify the Remark.

3. In the Edit Alarm Remark dialog box, enter the alarm remarks.

Version: B 211
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4. Click OK. You can view the entered alarm remark in the Remark column of the
corresponding alarm.

7.6.8 Exporting the Alarm Information

This section introduces how to print or export the alarm information.

Procedure

1. Refer to Viewing current alarms, Viewing Alarm History or View alarm logs. to
open the Current Alarm, Alarm History or Alarm Log tab.

2. Export the alarm Information.

4 Print alarms.

a) Select the alarm information entry and right-click to select Print.

b) In the Print Preview dialog box, set the page setup and other print
options.

c) Click Print and select printer and other printing settings in the
displayed Print dialog box.

d) Click OK.

4 Export alarms.

¡ Export all alarm entries. Right-click anywhere in the tab and select
Export→Export All Recordsto export all the alarm entries in format
of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export the selected alarm entry. Select the alarm entry and right-click
to select Export→Export Selected Record to export the selected
alarm entries in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

7.6.9 Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience

By recording the alarm maintenance experience, you can handle the alarms of the
same type quickly and conveniently.

212 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. See Viewing current alarms for opening the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Maintenance Experience.

3. In the Edit Maintenance Experience dialog box, select the applicable range,
enter the maintenance experience and click OK.

Note:

The recorded maintenance experience can be viewed in the


corresponding detailed alarm information. Besides, you can manage the
maintenance according to Managing Maintenance Experience.

7.6.10 Managing Maintenance Experience

By managing the maintenance experience, you can refer to the maintenance


experience for handling the alarms of the same type.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Maintenance Experience Management from


the main menu.

2. View the alarm maintenance experience in the Alarm Maintenance


Experience Management tab.

3. Do as follows:

4 In the right pane, click the button at the lower right part of the
corresponding entry, or right-click the entry, and select operations such as
Edit, Delete, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

4 Filter the maintenance experience entries. Click at the top of the left
pane to switch the tree structure and sort alarms by alarm name or type.
Then click the tree node to filter the maintenance experience entries in the
right pane.

4 Click the Import / Export data in the table on the right button at the top of
the right pane to import / export the maintenance experience in the XML
format.

Version: B 213
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 If no corresponding maintenance experience exists in the maintenance


experience library, users can create the new maintenance experience
according to step 4.

4. Create the maintenance experience.

1) In the right pane of the Alarm Maintenance Experience Management tab,


click New, or right-click in the blank area and select Add from the shortcut
menu.

2) In the New Alarm Maintenance Experience dialog box, set Equipment


Type, Alarm Name, enter the maintenance experience information and
click OK.

7.7 Customizing Alarms

Customize the alarm names or levels according to the maintenance requirements


for convenient management and efficient alarm monitoring.

7.7.1 Custom Alarm Name

To obtain the physical environment information of the equipment, you can customize
the environmental alarms of the equipment, such as the fire alarm, the water alarm,
and the too high / too low temperature alarm.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Custom Alarm Name from the main menu.

2. In the Please Select a NE dialog box, select the NE whose alarms are to be
customized and click OK.

3. In the left pane of the Custom Alarm Name tab, select the PUBA card or ONU
whose alarms are to be customized, click the English Alarm Name column
and select the corresponding name.

214 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

4. Click Save to save the settings to the database.

Other Operations

u Clear the customized alarm: Select the row containing the customized alarm
and click Clear to clear the customized alarm information. Then click Save.

u Define the alarm for the same object quickly: Click Apply to Object of the
Same Type to make it valid and apply the changes to the cards of the same
type.

u Display / hide the undefined alarm: Click Display Undefined Alarm / Hide
Undefined Alarm to display or hide the alarms not defined on the GUI.

u Set the defined alarm row by row: Click Hide Undefined Alarm, click Add to
set the alarm name, and click Save.

7.7.2 Custom Alarm Level

You can adjust the alarm levels of all objects, the designated types of equipment, or
the designated equipment as required.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Custom Alarm Level from the main menu.

2. At the lower right corner of the Customize Alarm Level tab, click Create; or
right-click in the blank area of the tab, and select Create.

3. In the New Customized Rule of the Alarm Level dialog box, set Alarm
Source.

Version: B 215
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Select All Objects, and the customized alarm levels apply to all objects.

4 Select Select Equipment, click on the right of Object Name and


select the card of a certain device in the Select Object dialog box. Then
click OK.

4 Select Select Equipment Type and click after Equipment Type


and select a certain equipment type in the Select Equipment Type dialog
box. Then click OK.

Note:

The priorities of custom alarm levels are as follows: equipment >


equipment type > all objects.

4. Click Select to select the desired alarms in the Select Alarm Name dialog box,
and click OK.

5. Click the Custom Level column of the corresponding alarm, and select the
desired alarm level. Then click OK.

6. In the Customize Alarm Level tab, check the information related to the custom
alarm levels, and click Save All.

Other Operations

u Delete the custom alarm level: In the Customize Alarm Level tab, select the
desired alarm level and click Delete.

u Modify the custom alarm level: In the Customize Alarm Level tab, click the
Custom Level column of the corresponding alarm entry to reset the alarm level.
Then click Save All.

216 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

7.8 Alarm / Event Remote Notification

By setting the alarm / event remote notification parameters (such as rules and
format), the UNM2000 sends the alarm / event information matching the conditions
to the maintainers via email or SMS so that they can obtain the alarm / event
information on the device and on the UNM2000 server timely even if they are not on
site.

7.8.1 Setting the Notification Communication Parameters

To send the remote email or SMS notification through the UNM2000, you need to
set the email notification parameters and SMS center relevant parameters.

Background Information

For setting the IP address, port, username, password and encoding protocol of the
SMS center, please contact the SMS center.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote


Notification Settings→Communication Parameters to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Email Notification, GSM Modem Settings and
ISMG Settings tabs respectively, and then click Apply to validate the settings.

7.8.2 Setting the Remote Notification Format of the Alarm /


Event

You can set the remote notification format of the alarm / event, including setting the
email subject and contents of the mail notification.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

Version: B 217
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote


Notification Settings→Message Format to open the Message Format
window.

3. Set the remote notification message format.

4 In the Email Notification tab, click the Select the Field buttons in the Title
and Content panes respectively to select the subject and contents of the
mail to be sent.

4 Select the SMS Notification tab, and click the Select the Field button to
select the contents to be sent.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the values set
last time in case of setting error.

7.8.3 Setting the Remote Notification Sending Rules of the


Alarm / Event

By setting the alarm / event remote notification rules (including the receiver
information, notification conditions, alarm sources, and time limit), the alarms
meeting the rules will be sent to the maintenance personnel so that they can obtain
the alarm information timely even if they are not on site.

Prerequisite

The parameters such as communication parameters, short message format and


sending delay have been set.

Procedure

1. Select AlarmSettingAlarm Notification Settings from the main menu.

2. Execute the following operations as needed.

4 In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding
entry, or right-click the entry, and select operations such as Disable/
Enable, Delete, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

218 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

4 In the left pane, select the corresponding receiver, modify the relevant
information if necessary in the right pane. Click Save All.

4 If the current alarm / event remote notification rules cannot meet the
requirements, you can create rules according to Step 3.

3. Add an alarm or event remote notification rule.

1) Select one of the following methods to open the Create Alarm Remote
Notification Rule dialog box.

¡ Select Recipient Info in the left pane, and click Create Receiver
Information in the right pane.

¡ Select Recipient Info in the left pane, right-click in the right pane, and
select Create Receiver Information from the shortcut menu.

¡ Right-click Recipient Info in the left pane, and select Create


Receiver Information from the shortcut menu.

2) Set the related information such as the recipient information, notification


conditions, alarm sources, and time limit as required.

3) After the setting is completed, click OK.

7.8.4 Setting the Sending Delay of the Alarm / Event Remote


Notification

Set the delayed duration to send the remote notification upon the occurrence of the
alarm / event. If the alarm is still not cleared after the duration, the remote
notification will be sent; otherwise, it will not be sent.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote


Notification Settings→Sending Delay to open the dialog box.

Version: B 219
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Select the NE types and alarm codes needing transmission delay. Users can
isolate the target alarm codes rapidly via the searching function.

Note:

u If an alarm is not set here, the system will send the corresponding
remote notification immediately after this alarm occurs without delay.

u You can modify the delay time interval of a certain alarm as required.

4. Click Set the Alarm Delay Time.

5. Set the alarm delay time interval and then click Apply. Update the Alarm
Forward Time of the selected alarm code to the new values set.

6. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

220 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

7.8.5 Sending Alarm / Event Remote Notification

The maintainer of the local equipment room, by analyzing and editing the current
alarms / evens of different stations through the UNM2000 client, send the alarms /
events of different areas or stations to the maintainer whose is nearest to the failure
location according to the distribution of maintainers. By this way, the alarms / events
can be quickly processed, improving the device maintenance efficiency.

Prerequisite

u The parameters and rules of the alarm / event remote sending are set.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the NE in the main topology, and select Current Alarm from the
shortcut menu.

2. In the Current Alarm dialog box, right-click an alarm entry and select Remote
Notification→Email/Message to open the Send a Mail to Notify or Notify via
SMS dialog box.

3. Select Receiver, enter the Title and Content, and then click OK.

7.9 Managing the Alarm / Event Data

If the alarm history data stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the
UNM2000 operation will be influenced. The alarm data saving function can save the
alarm history data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to
improve the UNM2000 operation performance. The UNM2000 supports manual
saving and overflow saving.

u Overflow saving: You can set the maximum alarm saving capacity and the
UNM2000 will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history
data reach the preset capacity, the UNM2000 will save the data to a specified
file to decrease its load.

Version: B 221
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Manual saving: You can save the alarm history data in the UNM2000 to a
specified file folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving period.
When the alarm history data saved in the database reach the preset time
period, the UNM2000 will save the data to a designated file folder. You can
mark the saving time in the name of the folder where the file is saved.

7.9.1 Setting the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving

Set the alarm / event overflow saving task. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether
the alarm / event history data in the database meets the preset conditions. If the
overflow saving conditions are met, the UNM2000 saves the alarm / event history
data automatically. The saved alarm / eventhistory data history will be deleted from
the database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which
cannot be deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the
corresponding task as needed.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data to open the Save the Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→Historical Overflow Save


from the left pane to view the existing historical data overflow save task.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding historical data saving task.

4 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

4 Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and
select Attribute.

4 In the left pane, click on the left side of Overflow Saving, and right-click
the corresponding overflow saving task to select Attribute.

222 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 7-5.

Table 7-5 Descriptions of the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving Task Settings

Parameter Description

Task The name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be edited by
Name users.
Enable Select it to enable the task.

Basic Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is Every 2
Task Type
Informa- days.
tion Execution
Sets the execution time of the task.
Time
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
Saving You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them
Mode into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
Exten- u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
ded overflow saving conditions directly.
informa-
If the data history exceeds the maximum saving entry number or
tion Overflow
exceeds the record threshold, a pre-set proportion of the database will
Limit
be saved.
Capacity The data history that exceeds the reserving days of the database will
Limit be saved during the saving task.

Version: B 223
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

5. Click OK.

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click
Execute Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom
right pane.

7.9.2 Setting the Manual Alarm / Event Saving

The UNM2000 supports saving alarm history and performance history manually,
preventing insufficient space in database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of alarm history / events,
which cannot be deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding
saving task as needed.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time.
You can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the
saved file by modifying the background configuration file. For specific
operations, contact the FiberHome technical engineer.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→Alarm History from the left pane
to view the existing manual saving task of alarm history.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding manual historical data saving task.

4 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

4 Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and
select Attribute.

4 In the left pane, click on the left side of Save Manually, and right-click
the corresponding manual saving task to select Attribute.

224 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 7-6.

Table 7-6 Descriptions of the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving Task Settings

Parameter Description

Parameter Description

Task
Basic The name of the saving task, which cannot be edited by users.
Name
Informa-
Enable Select it to enable the task.
tion
Task Type Sets the execution cycle of the task.

u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
Saving You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them
Mode into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions directly.

Exten- Data
ded Genera- Sets the generation time and end time of the data.
Informa- tion Time
tion Selecting
Sets the range of the object to be exported.
the Object

Records
that
Displays the number of the data entries that comply with the saving
Matched
conditions. This item cannot be edited.
the Saving
Conditions

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute
Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

7.10 Alarm Logs

The Alarm Log function supports querying alarm logs, collecting statistics on alarm
history logs and current alarm logs. You can set the statistical conditions as needed
to query the statistical result of alarm logs.

Query Alarm Log

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Query Alarm Log from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions according to the query requirements.

Version: B 225
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

u Click Select a Template to select the alarm log query template.

u Click Save as Template to save the query conditions already set as


an alarm log query template.

3. Click OK. The Alarm Log tab lists the query result.

Collecting Statistics of Alarm History Logs

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Alarm History Log Statistics from the main


menu.

2. Set the conditions for querying alarm history logs according to the statistical
requirements.

226 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

Note:

u Click Query by Template to select the statistical template of alarm


history logs.

u Click Save as Template to save the query conditions already set as


an statistical template of alarm history logs.

3. Click OK. The History Alarm Log Statistics tab lists the query result.

Collecting Statistics of Current Alarm Logs

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Current Alarm Log Statistics from the main


menu.

2. Set the conditions for querying current alarm logs according to the statistical
requirements.

Version: B 227
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

u Click Query by Template to select the statistical template of alarm


history logs.

u Click Save as Template to save the query conditions already set as


an statistical template of alarm history logs.

3. Click OK. The Current Alarm Log Statistics tab lists the query result.

7.11 Managing Alarm Frequency Analysis Rules

For alarms with a large quantity but little impact in current networks (such as ONU
fiber cut alarm, power disconnection alarm and MGC link alarm), you can set the
alarm frequency analysis rules and set Handling Strategy and Triggering
Conditions for different alarms. The UNM2000 will filter the alarms or generate new
alarms based on the rules.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Frequency


Analysis Rule to open the Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule tab.

228 Version: B
7 Alarm Management

2. In the Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule tab, select Add to open the Object
dialog box.

3. In the Basic Information tab of the Object dialog box, select Alarm Name and
set Handling Strategy and Triggering Conditions.

4. In the Object dialog box, select the Object Source tab to set the applicable
objects of the alarm frequency analysis rule.

5. Select the created alarm frequency analysis rule, click Enable to enable the
rule.

Version: B 229
8 Performance Management

The UNM2000 performs strong performance management functions. By monitoring


the performance, you can detect the silent failures during network running to
prevent network failures.

Basic Concepts

Managing Performance Query Templates

Setting the Performance Collection Time

Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a Batch Manner

Managing the Card Performance

Managing Performance Collection

Managing Performance Data

Managing Statistics Export Task

230 Version: B
8 Performance Management

8.1 Basic Concepts

With the performance management function, you can detect the silent failure of
network running to avoid network failure risks. You need to grasp the relevant basic
concepts before performing the performance monitoring operation.

Current Performance and Performance History

The performance data includes the current performance data and performance
history data. You can check whether the service is running normally in a specified
time period by browsing the performance data.

u Current Performance

The current performance refers to the data saved in the current performance
register of the NE. The current performance data can be divided into 15-minute
current performance and 24-hour current performance in terms of monitoring
period. When browsing the current performance, the UNM2000 will query the
performance data directly from the current performance register at the NE side.

u Performance History

The performance history refers to the performance data of NEs detected in the
past specified time period. When querying the performance history data, you
can select whether to query the performance history data at the NE side or at
the UNM2000 side according to the location where the data are stored.

The current performance data whose saved time exceeds the specified time
period will be saved to the NE performance history register.

Performance Threshold

By setting the performance threshold, you can filter the performance events that
change in the normal value range so that you can focus the critical performance
events.

The threshold is also called tolerance, which indicates the performance value that
meets the requirements for normal running of the device. If a certain performance
indicator exceeds the preset performance threshold, the performance degradation
trend has reached the degree that needs to be focused. Generally, it is
recommended to reserve a certain value margin when setting the performance
threshold so as to detect anomalies in advance.
Version: B 231
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Performance Saving

The performance saving function can save the performance history data in the
UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to improve the UNM2000
operation performance.

Performance Comparison

You can compare the performance data of the specified object in different time
periods to view the corresponding running status.

8.2 Managing Performance Query Templates

The UNM2000 supports setting the performance query conditions or statistical


conditions as templates. You can use the preset template to quickly query the
performance data.

8.2.1 Viewing Performance Templates

The following introduces how to view the performance template.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to


open the Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Click before Performance History Query Template to select the


corresponding template and view the details of the template in the right pane.

8.2.2 Creating a Performance Query Template

To avoid setting conditions every time upon query, you can set the commonly used
performance query conditions as a template so that you can use it next time. The
following introduces how to create a performance query template.

232 Version: B
8 Performance Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to


open the Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the New Performance
Query Template dialog box.

No. Access Method

1 In the Performance History Query Template tab, click at the upper left
corner.
Select Performance History Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the
2 blank area of the right pane and select New Performance History Query
Template from the shortcut menu.

Right-click Performance History Query Template in the left pane and select
3
New Performance History Query Template from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Performance History Query Template dialog box, set Template


Information, Basic Information and Advanced Information tabs.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Performance Query Template, select the


template in the Select Template dialog box, and copy the basic
information and advanced information of the selected template, improving
the setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

Other Operations

In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Set as / Cancel
Default Template, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

Version: B 233
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

8.2.3 Modifying a Performance Query Template

When setting the performance query template, you can modify the settings in case
the query condition setting error occurs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to


open the Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Click before Performance History Query Template to select the


corresponding template in the left pane and view the details of the template in
the right pane.

3. Modify the settings of the template in the right pane as needed and click Save
All.

Other Operations

In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Set as / Cancel
Default Template, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

8.3 Setting the Performance Collection Time

You can set the collection time of the 24-hour performance as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter


Settings dialog box.

234 Version: B
8 Performance Management

2. Select Performance Settings→Server Settings in the left pane to open the


dialog box.

3. Set the 24-hour performance collection time and then click Apply to apply the
settings.

8.4 Configuring the Performance Classification


Switch in a Batch Manner

The UNM2000 is added with the new function of Performance Classification


Switch Configuration. You can view the performance switch of the designated OLT
NE and modify the existing switches in a batch manner via the UNM2000, as well as
deliver the configurations to the device.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Performance→Performance Switch


Config to open the Pm Sort Switch Management tab.

2. Click Create NE Object to open the Add Object dialog box and then select
one or multiple NEs.

3. Click OK. The UNM2000 reads the performance classification switch status of
the selected device.

4. Modify the performance classification switches in a batch manner and then


click Save Config.

8.5 Managing the Card Performance

This section introduces how to manage the card performance, including viewing the
current performance, performance history, performance comparison, real-time
performance and performance history trend.

Version: B 235
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Current performance: Views the current 15-minute performance and the


performance of the latest sixteen 15-minute time intervals. These data are not
saved in the database.

u Performance history: Views the performance history data of the selected object
in the designated time range.

u Real-time performance: Views the real-time performance data of the selected


object. The collection period can be 10 seconds or 30 seconds; the collection
interval can be 15 minutes, 30 minutes, one hour, or 24 hours.

u Performance comparison: Compares the performance data in designated


period of an designated object, so as to understand the operating status of this
object in different periods.

u Performance history trend: Views the change trend of the performance history
data of the designated object.

8.5.1 Viewing the Current Performance

You can query the current performance so as to understand the running status of
devices.

Prerequisite

u The performance classification function of the corresponding device is


Enabled.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main
Topology tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open
NE Manager from the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following ways to view the current performance.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or


port, and select Current Performance from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window,right-click a card, and select


Current Performance from the shortcut menu.

236 Version: B
8 Performance Management

3. In the 15 Minutes drop-down box, select the corresponding item to query the
first to sixteenth 15-minute performance of the object.

4. (Optional) Right-click in the current performance tab and select Print, Copy
Cell or Export.

Subsequent Operation

Set the query conditions for current performance and then query again.

1. Click Query to display the Current Performance Query dialog box.

2. In the Current Performance Query dialog box, set Select the 15-minute
Performance, Performance Code Type, Object and Performance Code, and
then click OK.

8.5.2 Viewing Performance History

View the performance history to obtain the abnormal performance data of the
equipment, so as to instruct the current maintenance.

Version: B 237
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u The performance classification function of the corresponding device is


Enabled.

u The performance collection scheme has been set, and the system has waited
for one test period (15 minutes or 24 hours) at least.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select the access method mentioned in Table 8-1to open the Performance
History Query dialog box.

Table 8-1 Access Method of Viewing the Performance History

Operation Access Method


Select Performance→History Performance from the main menu.

Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select


Performance History from the shortcut menu.
Viewing the In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
performance corresponding card or port and select Performance History from the
history shortcut menu.
In the Diagram pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card and select Performance History from the shortcut
menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Performance History Query dialog box.

Note:

u In the Advance Information tab, you can select 10 query objects at


most.

u To avoid repeated setting of query conditions, you can click Save as


Template to save the current performance history query conditions
as a template, which can be selected for query by clicking Query
According to Template later.

3. After completing the settings, click OK; then the query results will be displayed
in the Performance History tab.

238 Version: B
8 Performance Management

8.5.3 Viewing the Performance Comparison

You can compare the performance data of the specified object in different time
periods to view the corresponding running status.

Prerequisite

u Wait until at least two measurement periods (15 minutes for each measurement
period) expireabove the list.

u The performance statistics function is enabled.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main
Topology tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open
NE Manager from the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following methods to open the Performance Comparison


Query dialog box.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or


port, and select Performance Comparison from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window,right-click a card, and select


Performance Comparison from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Performance Comparison Query dialog box, set performance


comparison query conditions.

Note:

Select at least two periods from the 15 Minutes drop-down list.

4. Click OK and view the performance comparison result in the Card


Performance Comparison tab.

Version: B 239
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

The system displays the comparison result in List View, Compare


Based on the Object and Histogram by default. You can select other
display modes as needed.

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print the comparison results or export
them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

8.5.4 Viewing Real-time Performance

You can monitor performance data of the selected resources in real time.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main
Topology tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open
NE Manager from the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following methods to open the Real-time Performance


Query dialog box.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or


port, and select Real-time Performance from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window, right-click a card, and select


Real-time Performance from the shortcut menu.

3. In the dialog box that appears, set Collection Cycle, Time Length, Object and
Performance Code.

4. Click OK. After a while, you can view the real-time performance of the selected
object in the Real-time Performance tab.

240 Version: B
8 Performance Management

Note:

u The system displays the real-time performance in List View and


Curve Chart by default. You can select other display modes as
needed.

u Click Stop to stop collecting real-time performance.

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print real-time performance results or
export them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

8.5.5 View Performance History Trend

You can view the performance history charts so as to understand the performance
data change trend of the specified object and the running status of the network.

Prerequisite

u The object to be queried has its performance history data.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→View Performance History Trend from the main menu.

Version: B 241
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

2. Set the query conditions in the Performance History Query dialog box.

Note:

u In the Advance Information tab, you can select 10 query objects at


most.

u To avoid repeated setting of query conditions, you can click Save as


Template to save the current performance history query conditions
as a template, which can be selected for query by clicking Query
According to Template later.

3. After completing the settings, click OK; then the query results will be displayed
in the History property trend tab.

Note:

The system displays the performance history in the List view or Curve
Chart mode by default. You can select other display modes as required.

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print real-time performance results or
export them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

8.6 Managing Performance Collection

You can use the scheduled performance collection to query or process the
performance data of the NE. The UNM2000 enables you to collect the performance
data through NE Performance Indicator Collection and NE Performance
Threshold Collection and export the result as a file to reduce repeated work.

8.6.1 Managing Performance Indicator Sets

The following introduces how to view and set the performance indicator sets.

242 Version: B
8 Performance Management

8.6.1.1 Viewing Performance Indicator Sets

View the existing performance indicator sets so as to quickly set the collection
indicator of the performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, click Indicator Set and view the
existing indicator sets in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired indicator set
to view the details of the indicator set, including Basic Information and
Member.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the indicator set

In the left pane, select the corresponding indicator set, modify the relevant
information if necessary in the right pane. Click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the
bottom, or simply right-click the entry and select Delete, Print, Copy Cell or
Export from the shortcut menu.

8.6.1.2 Creating a Performance Indicator Set

Set the performance indicator set so as to quickly set the collection indicator of the
performance collection task.

Version: B 243
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Indicator Set
tab.

No. Path
Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-
click in the right pane to select Create Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.

Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-
Creating a
click in the right pane to select Create Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.
perfor-
Right-click Indicator Set in the left pane and select Create Indicator Set from
mance
the shortcut menu.
indicator
Click Indicator Set in the left pane and click Create Indicator Set in the right
set
pane.

Click the Indicator Set in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select
Create Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic Information and Member tabs of the Create
Indicator Set dialog box.

Note:

Click the Copy from Other Indicator Set to open the Select Indicator
Set dialog box. Then select the desired indicator set to copy its
parameter settings, so as to improve setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

8.6.2 Managing Performance Threshold Sets

The following introduces how to view, create and use the performance threshold
sets.

244 Version: B
8 Performance Management

8.6.2.1 Viewing the Performance Threshold Set

View the performance threshold sets already set and select the desired threshold
set to quickly complete the statistics and query of performance threshold.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, select Threshold Set and view the
existing threshold sets in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired performance


threshold set to view the details of the threshold set, including Basic
Information and Member.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the performance threshold set

In the left pane, select the corresponding performance threshold set, modify the
relevant information in the right pane and then click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the
bottom, or simply right-click the entry and select Delete, Print, Copy Cell or
Export from the shortcut menu.

8.6.2.2 Creating a Performance Threshold Set

You can monitor the performance data by setting the performance threshold. If the
performance data exceeds the preset threshold value, the threshold crossing alarm
will be generated.

Version: B 245
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Threshold Set
tab.

Operation Path
Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-
click in the right pane to select Create Threshold Set from the shortcut
menu.
Select Threshold Set in the left pane and then right-click in the right pane to

Creating a select Create Threshold Set from the shortcut menu.

performance Right-click Threshold Set in the left pane and select Create Threshold Set
threshold set from the shortcut menu.
Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-
click in the right pane to select Create Threshold Set from the shortcut menu.

Select Threshold Set in the left pane and click Create Threshold Set in the
right pane.

3. Set the information in the Basic Information and Member dialog boxes. For
details, see Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Threshold Set Parameters

Parameter Description

Basic Threshold
Sets a name for the threshold set.
Informa- Set Name
tion NE Type Selects the corresponding NE type.

Comment Enters the remark information for the threshold set.


Perfor-
Clicks Select to select the performance codes for which the
mance
performance threshold is to be set.
Code
Member
Upper
Threshold Sets the upper limit for the corresponding performance code.
Value

246 Version: B
8 Performance Management

Table 8-2 Threshold Set Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description

Lower
Threshold Sets the lower limit for the corresponding performance code.
Value
Upper
Sets the upper clearing limit for the corresponding performance code.
Clear
The upper clearing limit must be smaller than the upper limit.
Limit
Lower
Sets the Lower clearing limit for the corresponding performance code.
Clear
The lower clearing limit must be greater than the lower limit.
Limit
Sets the threshold-crossing alarm code for the corresponding
performance code. The following options are available:
Alarm u PM_THRESHOLD_CRITICAL
Code u PM_THRESHOLD_MAJOR
u PM_THRESHOLD_MINOR
u PM_THRESHOLD_WARNING

Sets the applied object of the corresponding performance code. The


objects include the followings.

u All
Object
u Local Board
Type
u Local Board Port

u ONU

u ONU Port
Note: The performance threshold parameters must be meet the following conditions: Upper limit
> upper clearing limit > lower clearing limit > lower limit.

4. Click OK.

8.6.3 Managing Performance Collection Tasks

The following introduces how to view and create performance collection tasks.

8.6.3.1 Viewing Performance Collection Task

View the performance collection task already set and select the desired task set to
collect the performance.

Version: B 247
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, select Collection Task and view the
existing collection tasks in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired collection


task in the right pane to view the details of the task, including Basic
Information, Collection Object, Collection Specification and Collection
Cycle.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the performance collection task.

In the left pane, select the corresponding performance collection task, modify
the relevant information in the right pane and then click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the
bottom, or simply right-click the entry and select Disable, Delete, Print, Copy
Cell or Export from the shortcut menu.

8.6.3.2 Creating a Performance Collection Task

You can monitor the performance data by setting the performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

248 Version: B
8 Performance Management

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Collection
Task tab.

No. Path
Click Performance Collection Management in the left pane and click
1
Create Collection Task in the right pane.

Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-
2 click in the right pane to select Create Collection Task from the shortcut
menu.
Click Collection Task in the left pane and click Create Collection Task in
3
the right pane.

Select Collection Task in the left pane and then right-click in the right pane
4
to select Create Collection Task from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Collection Task in the left pane and select Create Collection
5
Task from the shortcut menu.

3. Set Basic Information, Collection Object, Collection Specification,


Collection Cycle in the Create Collection Task dialog box.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Collection Task, select the collection task in the
Select Collection Task dialog box, and copy the parameter settings of
corresponding task to improve the setting efficiency.

4. Click OK.

8.7 Managing Performance Data

If the data history stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the UNM2000
operation will be influenced. The performance data saving function can save the
historical performance data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so
as to improve the UNM2000 operation performance. The UNM2000 supports
manual saving and overflow saving.

Version: B 249
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Overflow saving: You can set the maximum saving capacity of performance
data and the UNM2000 will regularly check the historical performance data.
When the historical performance data reach the preset capacity, the UNM2000
will save the data to a specified file to decrease its load.

u Manual saving: You can save the historical performance data in the UNM2000
to a specified file folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving
period. When the historical performance data saved in the database reach the
preset time period, the UNM2000 will save the data to a designated file folder.
You can mark the saving time in the name of the folder where the file is saved.

8.7.1 Setting the Performance Overflow Saving

Set the performance overflow saving task. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether
the performance history data in the database meets the preset conditions. If the
overflow saving conditions are met, the UNM2000 saves the performance history
data automatically. The saved performance history data history will be deleted from
the database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which
cannot be deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the
corresponding task as needed.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data to open the Save the Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→15-min Performance History


Saving / →24-hour Performance History Saving from the left pane to view
the existing overflow saving tasks of alarm history.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding overflow saving task of performance history.

250 Version: B
8 Performance Management

No. Access Method


1 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click before Overflow Saving, and right-click an15-minute / 24-
3
hour performance history overflow saving task and select Attribute.

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 Performance Overflow Saving Task Settings

Parameter Description

Task The name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be edited by
Name users.
Enable Select it to enable the task.

Basic Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is Every 2
Task Type
Informa- days.
tion Execution
Sets the execution time of the task.
Time
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
Saving You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them
Mode into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
Exten- u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
ded overflow saving conditions directly.
informa-
If the data history exceeds the maximum saving entry number or
tion Overflow
exceeds the record threshold, a pre-set proportion of the database will
Limit
be saved.
Capacity The data history that exceeds the reserving days of the database will
Limit be saved during the saving task.

5. Click OK.

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click
Execute Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom
right pane.

Version: B 251
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

8.7.2 Setting Manual Performance Saving

The UNM2000 supports saving alarm history and performance history manually,
preventing insufficient space in database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of alarm history / events,
which cannot be deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding
saving task as needed.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time.
You can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the
saved file by modifying the background configuration file. For specific
operations, contact the FiberHome technical engineer.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→15-min Performance History


Saving / →24-hour Performance History Saving from the left pane to view
the existing manual saving task of performance history.

3. Select any one of the access methods below to open the Attribute dialog box
of the corresponding manual saving task of performance history.

No. Access Method


1 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click on the left side of Save Manually, and right-click the
3
corresponding manual saving task to select Attribute.

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 8-4.

252 Version: B
8 Performance Management

Table 8-4 Description of the Manual Performance Saving Task Parameters

Parameter Description

Task
Basic The name of the saving task, which cannot be edited by users.
Name
Informa-
Enable Select it to enable the task.
tion
Task Type Sets the execution cycle of the task.

u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
Saving You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them
Mode into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions directly.

Data
Extend
Genera- Sets the generation time and end time of the data.
Informa-
tion Time
tion
Selecting
Sets the range of the object to be exported.
the Object

Records
that
Displays the number of the data entries that comply with the saving
Matched
conditions. This item cannot be edited.
the Saving
Conditions

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute
Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

8.7.3 Analysis of PON traffic statistics

The analysis of PON traffic statistics function supports analyzing traffic, optical
power and device health. It provides abundant reports for analyzing and monitoring
services and device running status so as to provide detailed data for network
planning.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Version: B 253
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Analysis of PON Traffic Statistics from the main menu


to open the Query Traffic Statistical dialog box.

2. Set the statistical type, period, object, performance code and then click OK.
The Traffic Statistical Chart tab appears, displaying the statistical result.

Other Operations

By clicking the buttons on the toolbar of the Traffic Statistical Chart tab, you can
print or export the statistical result or display the statistical result in different charts.

8.7.4 Enabling / disabling FTP Report

After the FTP report is enabled, you can collect the traffic data and back them up to
a specified FTP server.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is set (click SystemParameter Settings and then select Service
Configuration→FTP Server Management).

u You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Pm FTP Switch Management from the main menu to


open the Pm FTP Report Switch Set tab.

2. Click Synchronized From Device to synchronize the device data.

3. Click Add NE to open the Please Select NE dialog box and then select desired
NEs.

4. Click OK.

5. Set the FTP server parameters, enable the traffic function and click OK.

254 Version: B
8 Performance Management

6. Click Save All.

Other Operations

Right-click the NE object in the list or click the button at the bottom of the GUI to
execute operations such as Delete.

Subsequent Operation

After enabling the FTP report, create a performance collection task to collect the
performance such as traffic, optical power and ONU distance. The following takes
collecting PON traffic data as an example.

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to


open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Collection Task and select Create Collection Task from the
shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Collection Task dialog box, set the task parameters and set
PON Traffic Collection to Yes to enable the FTP collection.

Version: B 255
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4. Click Create to complete the settings.

8.7.5 Top Ranking Statistics

TopN Traffic Ranking supports PON traffic ranking and equipment health degree
ranking, providing users with specialized and abundant reports.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Top rank statistics from the main menu to open the
Query Traffic Top Ranking dialog box.

256 Version: B
8 Performance Management

2. Set the statistical type, period, object, performance code and then click OK.
The Traffic Statistical Top Ranking tab appears, displaying the statistical
result.

Other Operations

By clicking the buttons on the toolbar of the Traffic Statistical Top Ranking tab,
you can Print or Export the statistical result or display the statistical result in
different charts.

8.8 Managing Statistics Export Task

This task facilitate users to analyze traffic data of the equipment and supports
exporting the analysis data. The statistics export task supports exporting traffic
analysis, TopN traffic ranking, 15-minute performance, and 15-minute performance
data of equipment traffic and health degree.

8.8.1 Export Task of Traffic Analysis

The export task of traffic analysis supports exporting the PON Traffic Analysis,
Equipment Health Degree Analysis and Optical Power Analysis reports to the
FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant report service to users.

Version: B 257
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic Statistic in the left pane to view the
existing export task of traffic analysis.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears
and click OK.

Table 8-5 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Performance Traffic Analysis

Parameter Description

The name of the traffic analysis export task, which cannot be


Task Name
edited by users.

Basic Enable Select it to enable the task.


Informa- Report Type Sets the analysis cycle of the report exporting.
tion Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Object Selecting the
Sets the range of the object to be exported.
Source Object

Extended Setting the XFTP


Sets the FTP server tp save files.
informa- Server
tion Report Template Sets the template used by the exported report.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

258 Version: B
8 Performance Management

8.8.2 Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking

This task supports exporting the reports of TopN Traffic Ranking and TopN
Equipment Health Degree Ranking to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized
and abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic TopN Ranking Statistic in the left


pane to view the existing export task of TopN traffic ranking.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears.
Click OK.

Table 8-6 Parameter Description of the Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking

Parameter Description

The name of the TopN traffic ranking export task, which


Task Name
cannot be edited by users.

Enable Select it to enable the task.


Basic
Report Type Sets the analysis cycle of the report exporting.
Information
Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Selecting the
Object Source Sets the range of the object to be exported.
Object

Setting the XFTP


Sets the FTP server tp save files.
Server
Report Template Sets the template used by the exported report.
Extended
Object Type Sets the object type in the exported report.
information
Performance Sets the performance specification in the exported
Specifications report.

Ranking Number Sets the ranking number in the exported report.

Version: B 259
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

8.8.3 Export Task of 15-minute Performance

The export task of 15-minute performance supports exporting the 15-minute


performance report to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant
report service to users.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→15 Minute Performance Export Task in the


left pane to view the existing export task of 15-minute performance.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears
and click OK.

Table 8-7 Parameter Description of the Export Task of 15-minute Performance

Parameter Description

The name of the 15-minute performance export task, which


Task Name
Basic cannot be edited by users.

Information Enable Select it to enable the task.


Task Type Sets the execution cycle of the report task.

Setting the XFTP


Sets the FTP server tp save files.
Server

Extended File Type Sets the file type of the exported report.

Information Start Time Sets the start time of the task.


End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Cycle Sets the cycle of the report exporting.

260 Version: B
8 Performance Management

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

8.8.4 Export Task of Equipment Traffic and 15-minute


Performance of Health Degree

The UNM2000 supports exporting the equipment flow and the 15-minute
performance of health degree to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and
abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic and Health Degree 15 Minute


Performance Export Task in the left pane to view the existing export task of
equipment traffic and the 15-minute performance of health degree.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears
and click OK.

Table 8-8 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Equipment Traffic and 15-minute
Performance of Health Degree

Parameter Description

The name of the export task of equipment traffic and 15-


Task Name minute performance of health degree. The name cannot
Basic
be edited.
Information
Enable Select it to enable the task.
Task Type Sets the execution cycle of the report task.

Selecting the
Object Source Sets the range of the object to be exported.
Object

Version: B 261
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 8-8 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Equipment Traffic and 15-minute
Performance of Health Degree (Continued)

Parameter Description

Setting the XFTP


Sets the FTP server tp save files.
Extended Server
information Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

262 Version: B
9 Log Management

The logs record the operation information of the UNM2000 users and the important
events occurred in the system. By querying, gathering statistics of and saving logs
regularly, the administrator can detect illegal login and operations, and analyze the
failures. By browsing and gathering statistics of login, the administrator can query
the operation information of the EMS and save the logs.

Log Management Policy

Log Type

Log Statistics

Managing System Logs

Managing Operation Logs

Managing Security Logs

Managing Northbound Interface Command Logs

Managing Log Data

Version: B 263
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

9.1 Log Management Policy

The log management policy includes UNM2000 log management, northbound


interface command log management, log saving management, log forwarding
management and log export management.

UNM2000 Logs

The UNM2000 logs include system logs, operation logs and security logs.

u The UNM2000 system logs record the tasks that influence the running of the
UNM2000. By viewing the UNM2000 system logs, you can detect the failure
that may influence the running of the UNM2000 and process it in a timely
manner so as to ensure the normal running of the UNM2000.

u The operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client
end (such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms)
except the operations that influence the security of the UNM2000. By viewing
the operation logs, you can understand the operation performed at the
UNM2000 client end so as to trace and audit the operations. This provides
support to elimination of the influence caused by misoperation.

u The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end
that influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout
and unlocking. By viewing the UNM2000 security logs, you can understand the
operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence the security of
the UNM2000. Querying the security logs on a regular basis can effectively
ensure the security of the UNM2000.

Northbound Interface Command Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
device by the users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound interface
commands. You can view the northbound command logs to understand the
northbound interface command operations performed on the device and obtain the
device running information. The northbound interface command logs include the
TL1 command logs and Web service command logs.

264 Version: B
9 Log Management

Log Saving

By setting the scheduled save task of logs, the UNM2000 will save the logs to the
specified directory regularly, which provides convenience for viewing logs and
reduces the records in the database so as to improve the running speed of the
system.

Log Forwarding

The UNM2000 supports forwarding the UNM2000 logs to the FTP server to save
various logs, providing reference for maintenance and relieving the storage
pressure of the UNM2000 sever.

Log Export

The UNM2000 enables you to export the UNM2000 logs to the specified directory
so as to reduce the storage pressure on the UNM2000 server. The logs can be
exported as a TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file.

9.2 Log Type

The UNM2000 log types include system logs, operation logs, security logs and
northbound interface command logs.

9.2.1 System Logs

The UNM2000 system logs record the running status of the UNM2000. By viewing
the UNM2000 system logs, you can detect the failure that may influence the running
of the UNM2000 and process it in a timely manner so as to ensure the normal
running of the UNM2000.

The system logs are stored in the database. You can query the operation logs via
the client end.

Version: B 265
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning,
Danger Level
Normal and Danger.

Source The UNM2000 module in which the operations are performed.

Time Time of the operation execution.

Operation
The operational terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
The operation result: Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.
u Succeeded: The operation is successful and all the operation results
Operation are returned.
Result u Failed: The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded: The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all
the operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

9.2.2 Operation Logs

The UNM2000 operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000
client end (such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms)
except the operations that influence the security of the UNM2000. By viewing the
operation logs, you can understand the operation performed at the UNM2000 client
end so as to trace and audit the operations.

The operation logs are stored in the database. You can view the operation logs via
the client end.

Log Meaning

The operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end
(such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms) except the
operations that influence the security of the UNM2000.

266 Version: B
9 Log Management

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
Operation
The name of the operation performed by users in the UNM2000.
Name
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning,
Danger Level
Normal and Danger.

Username The UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

The login mode of the user who performs the operation, including Login to
Login Mode
NMS and Login to Northbound Interface.

User Type The type of the UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

Operation
Time of the operation execution.
Time
Operation
The IP address of the terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

The operation result: Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.


u Succeeded: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation returned.
Result u Failed: The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded: The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all
the operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

9.2.3 Security Logs

The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that
influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and
unlocking. By viewing the security logs, you can understand the operations
performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence the security of the UNM2000.
Querying the security logs on a regular basis can effectively ensure the security of
the UNM2000.

The security logs are stored in the database. You can view the security logs via the
client end.

Version: B 267
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Log Meaning

The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that
influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and
unlocking.

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
Security
The security-related operations in the UNM2000.
Event
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning,
Danger Level
Normal and Danger.

Username The UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

The login mode of the user who performs the operation, including Login to
Login Mode
NMS and Login to Northbound Interface.

User Type The type of the UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

Operation
Time of the operation execution.
Time
Operation
The IP address of the terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

The operation result: Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.


u Succeeded: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation returned.
Result u Failed: The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded: The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all
the operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

9.2.4 Northbound Interface Command Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
device by the users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound interface
commands. You can view the northbound command logs to understand the
northbound interface command operations performed on the device and obtain the
device running information. The northbound interface command logs include the
TL1 command logs and Web service command logs.

268 Version: B
9 Log Management

Log Meaning

The northbound interface command logs records the operations performed on the
equipment by the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound
interface commands.

Description of Log Parameters

u Parameters of the TL1 Command Logs

Parameter Parameters
Row Set the row data of the statistical output table. The optional values include
Statistics operation object, type, name and result.

Set the column data of the statistical output table. The optional values include
quantity, operation type and result.

Column
Statistics Note:
The values of the statistical low data and column data
cannot be the same; otherwise, errors may occur.
If it is selected, the pattern of the statistical output table is displayed. The
Preview
pattern of this table depends on the values of the statistical row and column.

The operation result includes Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.


u Succeeded: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation
returned.
Result
u Failed: The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded: The operation is partly successful.

The start time range includes Latest and Time Range.


u Latest: Set the time period from the last operation time to the current
Start Time query, such as last four hours, last day and last two days.
u Time Range: Set the start time and end time of the TL1 command
operations.

Operation
The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users.
Name
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

Command The TL1 commands delivered to NEs by NE users.

u Parameters of Web Service Command Logs

Version: B 269
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Parameter Parameters
Row Set the row data of the statistical output table. The optional values include
Statistics operation object, name, type, name and result.

Set the column data of the statistical output table. The optional values include
quantity and operation result.

Column
Statistics Note:
The values of the statistical low data and column data
cannot be the same; otherwise, errors may occur.
If it is selected, the pattern of the statistical output table is displayed. The
Preview
pattern of this table depends on the values of the statistical row and column.

The operation result includes Succeeded and Failed.


Operation u Succeeded: The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Result returned.
u Failed: The operation is failed.

The start time range includes Latest and Time Range.


u Latest: Set the time period from the last operation time to the current
Start Time query, such as last four hours, last day and last two days.
u Time Range: Set the start time and end time of the TL1 command
operations.

OLT IP The IP address of the OLT in the Web service command log.

ONU
The MAC address or SN of the ONU in the Web service command log.
MAC/SN
HG MAC The MAC address or SN of the ONU in the Web service command log.

Failure
The reason why the operation failed.
reason
Operation
The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users.
Name
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

Command The TL1 commands delivered to NEs by NE users.

9.3 Log Statistics

The UNM2000 supports gathering the statistics of the system logs, operation logs,
security logs and TL1 command logs. You can gather statistics and perform analysis
for logs by setting System Log Statistics Conditions and Query Filtering

270 Version: B
9 Log Management

Conditions, so as to understand the statistics conditions of relevant operation


quickly.

Procedure

The procedure of gathering statistics of logs of different types are similar. The
following takes the system log as an example.

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical System Logs.

2. Set the query conditions according to Table 9-1 and click OK.

Table 9-1 Parameter Description of the statistical system logs Dialog Box

Parameter Name Description Setting Method

Sets the items to be


Row Select the items to be displayed in the drop-
displayed in the row of
Basic Statistics down menu of Row Statistics.
the statistics result.
Infor-
Sets the items to be
mation Column Select the items to be displayed in the drop-
displayed in the column
Statistics down menu of Column Statistics.
of the statistics result.

Select Source Info, click , and then


select the system to be queried in the Select
Select the query objects
Source Source dialog box.
of the system log.
Description:
u The system logs of all users will be
queried by default.

Query the operation In the Operation Result group box, select


Operation Result record according to the one or more options. By default, all the
operation result. options are selected.

Query the operation In the Danger Level group box, select one or
Danger Level record according to more options. By default, all the options are
danger level. selected.

Version: B 271
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 9-1 Parameter Description of the statistical system logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Name Description Setting Method

Set the time range to


query the operation logs
Select Start Time or End Time and set time
Time Range in this time range. If no
in the following text box.
time range is set, it will
query all logs.

Filter the operation logs


by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details contain in the text
Details contain text box at the right side.
box.

3. View the result in the Statistical System Logs tab.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions and view the query result.

4 Query According to Template: Select the existing template and query the
logs that comply with the conditions.

9.4 Managing System Logs

The system logs records the automatic operations of the UNM2000, facilitating
users to understand the UNM2000 running status. The following introduces how to
manage the system log templates and query system logs.

9.4.1 Managing System Log Template

To query the system logs conveniently and quickly, you can set the routine system
log type as the query template.

272 Version: B
9 Log Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Search the System Logs.

2. Click Query in the System Logs tab to bring up the Query System Logs
dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the system log query requirement,
referring to Table 9-2.

Table 9-2 Parameter Description of the Query System Logs Dialog Box

Parameter
Description Setting Method
Name

Select Source Info, click , and then select


the system to be queried in the Select Source
Select the query objects of
Source dialog box.
the system log.
Description:
u The system logs of all users will be queried
by default.

Query the operation record In the Operation Result group box, select one
Operation
according to the operation or more options. By default, all the options are
Result
result. selected.
In the Danger Level group box, select one or
Query the operation record
Danger Level more options. By default, all the options are
according to danger level.
selected.
Set the time range to
query the operation logs in
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Time Range this time range. If no time
the following text box.
range is set, it will query all
logs.

Filter the operation logs by


Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details querying the information in
contained in the Details contain in the text box
contain the Details contain text
at the right side.
box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the system log query template.

Version: B 273
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the System Logs tab, right-click the item to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

9.4.2 Searching System Logs

The system logs records the automatic operations of the UNM2000, facilitating
users to understand the UNM2000 running status.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Search the System Logs.

2. View the query result in the System Logs tab. All the system logs of the current
day will be queried by default.

3. Double-click the selected system log in the System Logs tab to view the
detailed information.

Note:

Click the title column of the query result to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

274 Version: B
9 Log Management

4 Query According to Template: Select the existing template and query the
logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing System Log Template.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menu

Right-click the System Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

u Query: Sets the query conditions and view the query result.

u Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

u Template Management: Manages the log query template. You can edit or
delete the existing log template.

u Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

u Print: Print the queried log.

u Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

u Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

9.5 Managing Operation Logs

The operation logs record the operation information of users, enabling you to trace
and check user operations. The following introduces how to manage the operation
log templates and query operation logs.

9.5.1 Managing Operation Log Templates

To query the user operations conveniently and quickly, you can set the routine
operation log types as the query template.

Version: B 275
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Operation Logs.

2. Click Query in the Operation Logs tab to bring up the Query Operation Logs
dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the operation log query requirement,
referring to Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Parameters in the Query Operation Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting Method

Select Username, click , and select the


user to be queried in the Select User dialog
box.
User- Select users to query Description:
name their operation logs. u The operation logs of all users will be
queried by default.
User u The Select User dialog box only shows
Informa- the users that have logged into the
tion UNM2000 and performed operations.

Select the operation Select Operation Terminal, click and


Opera-
terminal and query select the operation terminal to be queried in
tion
operation records the Select Operation Terminal dialog box.
Termin-
according to the Description:
al
operation terminal. The operation logs of all operation terminals will
be queried by default.

Query the operation In the Operation Result group box, select one
Operation Result record according to or more options. By default, all the options are
the operation result. selected.
Query the operation In the Danger Level group box, select one or
Danger Level record according to more options. By default, all the options are
danger level. selected.

276 Version: B
9 Log Management

Table 9-3 Parameters in the Query Operation Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting Method

Set the time range to


query the operation
logs in this time Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Start Time
range. If no time the following text box.
range is set, it will
query all logs.

Filter the operation


logs by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details contain in the text box
Details contain text at the right side.
box.
Click Select under the Operation Name box
Sets the operations to
Operation Name and select the desired operation name from the
be queried.
Select Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select corresponding to Operation


Sets the operation Object. Select the name of operation to be
Operation Object
object to be queried. queried in the Select Operation Object dialog
box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the operation log query template.

Other Operations

In the Operation Logs tab, right-click the item to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

9.5.2 Querying Operation Logs

The operation logs record the operation information of users, enabling you to trace
and check user operations.

Background Information

u Filter according to username when querying operation logs. The Unselected


Value Filter in the Select User dialog box only displays the usernames that
has performed operations.

u The range of operation logs that users of different groups can view:

Version: B 277
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Users in Administrators group can view the operation logs of all the
users.

4 Users in Security Management Group with the Query Operation Logs


authority can view the operation logs of all users.

4 The common users that have the query operation logs authority but
belong to neither the Security Management Group nor the
Administrators group can only view their own operation logs.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Operation Logs.

2. View the query result in the Operation Logs tab. All the operation logs of the
current day will be queried by default.

3. Double-click the selected operation log in the Operation Logs tab to view the
detailed information.

Note:

Click the title column of the query result to sequence the result.

278 Version: B
9 Log Management

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Select the existing template and query the
logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions and view the query result. Managing
Operation Log Templates shows the parameter descriptions of the query
condition.

4 Delete: Deletes the selected operation log.

4 View Data: view the data information of operation records in the


corresponding operation logs.

Note:

The View Data function is only available for viewing the operation logs of
writing service configuration to device.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menu

Right-click the Operation Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions and view the query result. Managing
Operation Log Templates shows the parameter descriptions of the query
condition.

4 View Data: view the data information of operation records in the


corresponding operation logs.

4 Delete: Deletes the selected operation log.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Template Management: Manages the log query template. You can edit or
delete the existing log template.

4 Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

Version: B 279
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Print: Print the queried operation log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

9.6 Managing Security Logs

The security logs record the information on the security operations performed by the
UNM2000. Querying security logs regularly helps ensuring the security of the
network management system effectively. The following introduces how to manage
security log templates and query the security logs.

9.6.1 Managing Security Log Template

To query the UNM2000 security logs conveniently and quickly, you can set the
routine security log type as the query template.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Security Logs.

2. Click Query in the Security Logs tab to bring up the Query Security Logs
dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the security log query requirement,
referring to Table 9-4.

280 Version: B
9 Log Management

Table 9-4 Parameter Description of the Query Security Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Name Description Setting Method

Select Username, click , and select the


user to be queried in the Select User dialog
box.
User- Select users to query Description:
name their security logs. u The security logs of all users will be
queried by default.
User u The Select User dialog box only shows
Infor- the users that have logged into the
mation UNM2000.

Select Operation Terminal, click and


Select the operation
Opera- select the operation terminal to be queried in
terminal. Query security
tion the Select Operation Terminal dialog box.
records according to the
Terminal Description:
operation terminal.
The security logs of all operation terminals
will be queried by default.

Query the operation In the Operation Result group box, select


Operation Result record according to the one or more options. By default, all the
security result. options are selected.

Query the security In the Danger Level group box, select one or
Danger Level record according to more options. By default, all the options are
danger level. selected.
Set the time range to
query the security
operation logs in this Select Start Time or End Time and set time
Start Time
time range. If no time in the following text box.
range is set, it will query
all logs.

Filters the security logs


by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details contain in the text
Details contain text box at the right side.
box.

Version: B 281
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 9-4 Parameter Description of the Query Security Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Name Description Setting Method

Click Select corresponding to Select


Select Security Sets the security event Security Event. Select the name of
Event to be queried. operation to be queried in the Select
Security Event dialog box.

Click Select corresponding to Select


Select the Sets the operation object Operation Object. Select the name of
operation object. to be queried. operation to be queried in the Select
Operation Object dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the security log query template.

Other Operations

In the Security Logs tab, right-click the item to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

9.6.2 Querying Security Logs

The security logs record the information on the security operations performed by the
UNM2000. Querying security logs regularly helps ensuring the security of the
network management system effectively.

Background Information

The user with the Query Security Logs authority can view the security logs of all
users.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Security Logs.

2. In the Security Logs tab, view the query result. The system displays the
security logs of the current day by default.

282 Version: B
9 Log Management

3. In the Security Logs tab, double-click the desired security log to view the log
details.

Note:

Click the title column of the query result to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Select the existing template and query the
logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Security Log Template.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Security Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Security Log Template.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Template management: Manages the log query templates or edits / deletes


the existing log query template. See Managing Security Log Template.

Version: B 283
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4 Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

4 Print: Print the queried log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

9.7 Managing Northbound Interface Command


Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
device by the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound
interface commands. You can view the northbound command logs to understand
the northbound interface command operations received by the device and obtain
the device running information.

9.7.1 Managing TL1 Command Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the TL1 commands accepted and executed by
the NEs, you can set the most concerned TL1 commands as a query template.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command


Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select
TL1 Command Logs tab and click Query to open the Query TL1 Command
Log dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed, referring to Table 9-5.

284 Version: B
9 Log Management

Table 9-5 Description of the Parameters in the Query TL1 Command Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Name Description Setting Method

Query the operation In the Operation Result group box, select


Operation Result record according to the one or more options. By default, all the
operation result. options are selected.

Set the time range to


query the security
operation logs in this Select Start Time or End Time and set time
Start Time
time range. If no time in the following text box.
range is set, it will query
all logs.

Filters the operation logs


Select Details contain and enter the fields
by the information
Details contain contained in the Details contain in the text
entered in the Details
box at the right side.
contain textbox.
Selects the operation Click Select under the Operation Name box
Select Operation
commands to be and select the desired operation name from
Name
queried. the Select Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select corresponding to Operation


Select the Sets the operation object Object. Select the name of operation to be
operation object. to be queried. queried in the Select Operation Object
dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter the
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

9.7.2 Querying TL1 Command Logs

The TL1 command logs record the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the TL1 commands. You can view
the TL1 command logs to understand the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users via the TL1 commands and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Version: B 285
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command


Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select
TL1 Command Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all the
TL1 command logs of the current day.

3. Double-click a TL1 command log to view the details of theTL1 command log.

Note:

Click the title column of the query result to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Select the existing template and query the
logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing TL1 Command Log
Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the TL1 Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing TL1 Command Log
Templates.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

286 Version: B
9 Log Management

4 Template management: Manages the log query templates or edits / deletes


the existing log query template. See Managing TL1 Command Log
Templates.

4 Copy: Select to copy the cell or row and edit or delete the existing log
template.

4 Print: Print the queried log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

9.7.3 Querying the Web Service Command Log Template

To conveniently and quickly query the Web service commands accepted and
executed by the NEs, you can set the most concerned Web service commands as a
query template.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command


Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select
Web Service Command Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Web
Service Command Log dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed. See Table 9-6.

Version: B 287
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 9-6 Description of the Parameters in the Query Web Service Command Log Dialog
Box

Parameter Description Setting Method

Query the operation record In the Operation Result group box, select
Operation Result according to the operation one or more options. By default, all the
result. options are selected.

Set the time range to query


the security operation logs
Select Lastest Time or Time Ranger and
Start Time in this time range. If no
set time.
time range is set, it will
query all logs.

Set the IP address of the


OLT IP OLT in the Web service Set it manually.
command log.

Set the MAC address or


ONU MAC/SN SN of the ONU in the Web Set it manually.
service command log.

Set the MAC address of


the card home gateway of
HG MAC Set it manually.
the ONU in the Web
service command log.

Query the operation


Failure reason records according to the Set it manually.
operation failure.

Filters the operation logs


Select Details contain and enter the fields
by the information entered
Details contain contained in the Details contain in the text
in the Details contain
box at the right side.
textbox.
Click Select under the Operation Name box
Select Operation Selects the operation
and select the desired operation name from
Name commands to be queried.
the Select Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select corresponding to Operation


Select the Sets the operation object Object. Select the name of operation to be
operation object. to be queried. queried in the Select Operation Object
dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter the
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

288 Version: B
9 Log Management

9.7.4 Querying the Web Service Command Logs

The Web service command logs record the operations performed on the device by
the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the Web service commands.
You can view the Web service command logs to understand the operations
performed on the device by the UNM2000 users via the Web Service commands
and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command


Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select
Web Service Command Logs tab to view the query result. The system
queries all the Web service command logs of the current day.

3. Double-click a Web service command log to view the details of the Web service
command log.

Note:

Click the title column of the query result to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Select the existing template and query the
logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Querying the Web Service
Command Log Template.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

Version: B 289
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Web Service Command Logs dialog box to bring up the
shortcut menu. The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Querying the Web Service
Command Log Template.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them in the client end.

4 Template management: Manages the log query templates or edits / deletes


the existing log query template. See Querying the Web Service Command
Log Template.

4 Copy: Select to copy the cell or row and edit or delete the existing log
template.

4 Print: Print the queried log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

9.8 Managing Log Data

By saving logs, you can clear the unnecessary logs manually or on a regular basis
to avoid that the logs occupy too many resources. By exporting the logs as files, you
can view logs or locate failures.

9.8.1 Managing the Log Forwarding Server

By setting the log forwarding server, you can forward the logs of the UNM2000 to
other servers.

9.8.1.1 Viewing the Syslog Forwarding Server

Check whether the preset Syslog forwarding server meets the requirement.

290 Version: B
9 Log Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→System Log Forwarding Server Management from the


main menu to open the System Log Forwarding Server Management tab,
and view the information of the existing Syslog forwarding server.

Other Operations

Click the button below or the right-click the corresponding entry to select Modify,
Stop / Enable, Delete, Refresh, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

9.8.1.2 Adding A Syslog Forwarding Server

You can add a new Syslog forwarding server if the existing server cannot meet the
requirement.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→System Log Forwarding Server Management from the


main menu to open the System Log Forwarding Server Management tab.

2. Right-click in the blank area of the System Log Forwarding Server


Management tab and select Add to open the System Log Forwarding Server
Settings dialog box.

3. Set the parameters of the Syslog forwarding server, referring to Table 9-7.

Table 9-7 Description of the Syslog Forwarding Server

Parameter Description

Server Server IP Sets the IP address of the Syslog forwarding server.


Information
Server Port Sets the port of the Syslog forwarding server.

Version: B 291
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 9-7 Description of the Syslog Forwarding Server (Continued)

Parameter Description

Sets the type of log to be forwarded, including:


u System Logs
u Security Logs
Log Type u Operation Logs
u NE Logs
u TL1 Logs
u Current Alarm Logs

Sets the level of logs to be forwarded, including:


u EMERG: the system is unavailable.
u ALERT: the event should be handled in a timely manner.
u CRIT: critical event.
Log Level u ERR: error event.
u WARNING: warning event.
u NOTICE: common but important event.
u INFO: useful information.
u DEBUG: debugging information.

Sets the facility level to be forwarded, consistent with the setting


Syslog
on the Syslog forwarding server side. including:
Information
u KERN: kernel log information.
u USER: random user log information.
u MAIL: mail system log information.
u DAEMON: system daemon process log information.
u AUTH: security management log information.
Facility u SYSLOG: Syslog forwarding server log information.
Level u LPR: printer log information.
u NEWS: news service log information.
u UUCP: UUCP system log information.
u CRON: log information of the system daemon process
CRON.
u AUTHPRIV: private security management log information.
u DAEMON: system daemon process log information.
u LOCAL0 to 7: reserve for local.
Sets the transmission protocol type, including TCP and UDP,
protocol
which should be consistent with the setting of the Syslog
type
forwarding server.

Character
Sets the character string, and the logs comply with the character
Other String
string filtering conditions will be forwarded.
Information Filtering

Comment Sets the remark information.


Enable Sets whether to enable the current settings.

292 Version: B
9 Log Management

4. Click OK to add a new Syslog forwarding server.

9.8.2 Setting the Log Overflow Saving

Set the saving task of the log overflow. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether the
log data history (operation logs, TL1 logs, system logs, NE logs and security logs) of
the database meets the pre-set conditions. If the overflow saving conditions are
met, the UNM2000 saves the log data automatically. The saved log data history will
be deleted from the database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which
cannot be deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the
corresponding task as needed.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The procedures of setting log overflow saving are similar. The following takes
setting operation log overflow saving as an example.

1. Select System→Save Data to open the Save the Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→Save Operation Log


Overflow from the left pane to view the existing saving task of operation log
overflow.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding saving task of alarm history overflow.

No. Access Method


1 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click on the left side of Overflow Saving, and right-click the
3
corresponding overflow saving task to select Attribute.

Version: B 293
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 9-8.

Table 9-8 Description of the Overflow Saving Task Parameters

Parameter Description

Task The name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be edited by
Name users.
Enable Select it to enable the task.
Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is Every 2
Basic Task Type
days.
Information
Execution
Sets the execution time of the task.
Time
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
Saving You can convert the data history into CSV files and save them
Mode into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets the
Extended overflow saving conditions directly.
information
If the data history exceeds the maximum saving entry number or
Overflow
exceeds the record threshold, a pre-set proportion of the database
Limit
will be saved.
Capacity The data history that exceeds the reserving days of the database
Limit will be saved during the saving task.

5. Click OK.

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click
Execute Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom
right pane.

9.8.3 Setting Manual Log Saving

To prevent insufficient space, the UNM2000 supports saving operation logs, system
logs, NE logs, security logs and TL1 logs manually

294 Version: B
9 Log Management

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of log data, which cannot
be deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding saving task as
needed.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time.
You can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the
saved file by modifying the background configuration file. For specific
operations, contact the FiberHome technical engineer. The procedures
for setting manual saving of logs are the similar. The following uses the
operation logs as an example to introduce how to set the manual saving.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→Save Operation Log from the


left pane to view the existing manual saving task of operation log.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding manual saving task of data history.

No. Access Method


1 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click on the left side of Save Manually, and right-click the
3
corresponding manual saving task to select Attribute.

4. Modify the parameters of the corresponding task in the Attribute dialog box
according to requirement and click OK.

Version: B 295
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute
Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

296 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Resource management manages the physical asset information and important


logical configuration of all the devices in the network. The UNM2000 provides the
unified query and statistics functions for the resources in the network. You can
understand the usage of various resources in the network timely via the resource
management.

The UNM2000 supports statistics and statistical result export for the following
resources:

u Physical resources: Include NE resources, card resources, port resources,


ONU resources, ONU port resources and MDU port resources.

u Other types: Include ONU users, local end VLANs, NE MGC services, ONU
MGC services, device types, PON device capability, ONU WAN connection
service, ONU out-of-service timing length and management VLAN.

Managing Resource Statistics Template

Physical Resource Statistics

Resource Statistics of Other Types

Exporting Physical Resource Statistics

Exporting Resource Statistics of Other Types

Example of Resource Statistics

Importing the ODN NSM Information

Querying Multiple ONUs

Query Board By Serial Number

Querying the MDU Phone Number

ONU RMS Error Information Query

Version: B 297
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs

Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner

Gateway Type Config

Unauthorized ONU List

Modify ONU Names by Importing EXCEL

298 Version: B
10 Resource Management

10.1 Managing Resource Statistics Template

This chapter introduces how to query and create the resource statistics template.

10.1.1 Viewing Resource Statistical Templates

You can view the resource statistical templates already set and saved. If a template
meets your requirements for querying resources of the same conditions, you can
use the template directly without the need to set the conditions. This section
introduces how to view the resource statistical templates already customized in the
UNM2000.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time.
You can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the
saved file by modifying the background configuration file. For specific
operations, contact the FiberHome technical engineer. The following
introduces how to query the NE resource statistical template. The
procedures for querying other templates are similar with the only
difference in the access method.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics in the main menu to display the


Resource Statistics tab.

2. In the navigation tree in left pane, select Resource Statistics→Physical


Resource Statistics→NE Resource Statistics.

3. Select the NE information list in the Statistics Template drop-down list.

4. Click Custom next to Statistics Template to open the Custom Template


dialog box to view the existing statistical templates.

Version: B 299
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Note:

The NE information list and slot usage information list are the system
default templates, which cannot be modified or deleted.

Other Operations

When the statistical items set in the template do not meet the requirements for
resource statistics, you can modify the created template. The NE information list
and slot usage information list are the system default templates and cannot be
modified.

1. Select the desired template entry, click Modify to open the Modify the
Template dialog box.

2. Modify the statistical items as needed and click OK.

300 Version: B
10 Resource Management

10.1.2 Customizing a Resource Statistical Template

When the existing resource statistical templates in the UNM2000 do not meet the
requirements for resource query, you can customize resource statistical templates
according to your needs. The following introduces how to customize resource
statistical templates in the UNM2000.

Note:

The following uses the NE resource statistical template as an example.


You can follow the same procedures to customize other templates with
the only difference in the access method.

Caution:

For PON Device Capability Statistics, only the default template can be
used and no new one can be created.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics in the main menu to display the


Resource Statistics tab.

2. In the navigation tree in left pane, select Resource Statistics→Physical


Resource Statistics→NE Resource Statistics.

3. Select the ONU information list in the Statistics Template drop-down list.

4. Click Custom next to Statistics Template to open the Custom Template


dialog box to view the existing statistical templates.

5. In the Custom Template dialog box, click Create to open the Create Template
dialog box.

Version: B 301
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

6. Set Template Name, Template Type and Statistics Combination Item, and
then click OK. The added template appears in the Custom Template dialog
box.

7. Close the Custom Template dialog box and the added template appears in the
Statistics Template drop-down list.

10.2 Physical Resource Statistics

You can understand the NEs, cards, ports, ONUs, ONU ports, MDU ports and other
physical resources in the network through the physical resource statistics.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The procedures for collecting statistics of various physical resources are similar.
The following introduces how to collect statistics of NE information list.

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics in the main menu to display the


Resource Statistics tab.

2. In the navigation tree in left pane, select Resource Statistics→Physical


Resource Statistics→NE Resource Statistics.

3. Select the ONU information list in the Statistics Template drop-down list.

4. Click Statistics Range to open the Select Object dialog box.

5. Select the desired object or use the search function to select the object quickly.
Then click OK to view the statistical result.

302 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Other Operations

Right-click an entry in the statistical result and select Copy Cell, Print or Export
from the shortcut menu.

10.3 Resource Statistics of Other Types

Resource statistics of other types include ONU users, local end VLANs, NE MGC
services, ONU MGC services, device types, PON device capability, ONU WAN
connection service, ONU out-of-service timing length and management VLAN.

Note:

As the procedures for gathering statistics of resources of other types are


similar, the following uses the ONU user statistics as an example.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics in the main menu to display the


Resource Statistics tab.

2. In the left navigation tree, select Resource Statistics→Other Type Resource


→ONU User Statistics.

Version: B 303
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Select the ONU information list in the Statistics Template drop-down list.

4. Click Statistics Range to open the Select Object dialog box.

5. Select the desired object or use the search function to select the object quickly.
Then click OK to view the statistical result.

Other Operations

Right-click an entry in the statistical result and select Copy Cell, Print or Export
from the shortcut menu.

10.4 Exporting Physical Resource Statistics

You can export the physical resource statistics to the preset FTP server.

Note:

The procedures of exporting physical resource statistics are similar. In


the following the NE resource statistics are exported as an example.

Background Information

The physical resources that can be exported include NE resources, card resources,
port resources, ONU resources, ONU port resources and MDU port resources.

304 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Prerequisite

u The statistical template is set. See Customizing a Resource Statistical


Template.

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics in the main menu to display the


Resource Statistics tab.

2. In the left navigation tree, select Export Statistics→Physical Resource


Statistics Export→Physical Resource Statistics Export to view the existing
export tasks.

3. Execute the following operations as needed.

4 If the existing task has met the requirements, run the task at the scheduled
time; or click Execute now, or select Execute now from the shortcut menu
to start the task.

Note:

The task will automatically run at the scheduled time and the user can
obtain the exported statistical information file from the FTP server when
the execution result displays Successful.

4 If the existing task has not met the requirements, ➔ Step 4.

4. Create a physical resource statistics task.

1) Right-click in a blank area of the GUI and select Create from the shortcut
menu to open the Create NE Resource Statistics Export dialog box.

2) Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source and Extend
information tabs and then click OK. The created task appears on the GUI.

3) Select a task and click Execute Now or select Execute Now from the
shortcut menu to execute the task immediately.

Version: B 305
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click an entry in the statistical result and select the corresponding shortcut
menu item to delete, print or export the entry or view the attribute.

10.5 Exporting Resource Statistics of Other Types

You can export statistical information of resources like the ONU users, local end
VLANs, NE MGC services, ONU MGC services, device types, ONU WAN
connection services, ONU out-of-service time length and management VLAN as
needed.

Note:

The procedures of exporting resource statistics of other types are similar.


In the following the ONU user statistics are exported as an example.

Prerequisite

u The statistical template is set. See Customizing a Resource Statistical


Template.

u The FTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics in the main menu to display the


Resource Statistics tab.

2. In the left navigation tree, select Export Statistics→Statistics Export of


Other Types→ONU User Statistics Export to view the existing export tasks.

3. Execute the following operations as needed.

4 If the existing task has met the requirements, run the task at the scheduled
time; or click Execute now, or select Execute now from the shortcut menu
to start the task.

306 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Note:

The task will automatically run at the scheduled time and the user can
obtain the exported statistical information file from the FTP server when
the execution result displays Successful.

4 If the existing task has not met the requirements, ➔ Step 4.

4. Add an ONU user statistical task.

1) Right-click in a blank area of the GUI and select Create from the shortcut
menu to open the Create ONU User Statistics Export dialog box.

2) Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source and Extend
information tabs and then click OK. The created task appears on the GUI.

3) Select a task and click Execute Now or select Execute Now from the
shortcut menu to execute the task immediately.

Other Operations

Right-click an entry in the statistical result and select the corresponding shortcut
menu item to delete, print or export the entry or view the attribute.

10.6 Example of Resource Statistics

The resource statistics of the UNM2000 manages the physical asset information
and important logical configuration of all the devices in the network.
The UNM2000 provides the unified query and statistics functions for the resources
in the network. You can understand the resource usage in the network timely via the
resource management.

Note:

Considering the users' use preferences, the UNM2000 supports up to 20


thousand data entries and the excessive data will not be displayed. You
can export the statistical resources to view all data.

Version: B 307
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Viewing the Port Usage of the ONU Under a Specified NE

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu.

2. Select Physical Resource Statistics→ONU Port Resource Statistics.

3. Click Custom→Create to open the Create Template dialog box. Enter the
template name, select the template type and the ONU port information entries
to be collected, and then click OK to create the statistical template.

Note:

Template type description:

u Info statistics: Collects the statistics on basic attributes of the


statistical objects.

u Quantity statistics: Collects the quantities of the types of the


statistical objects.

4. Click Statistics Range, select the statistical object and click OK.

Viewing the Quantity of ONUs of the Specified NE

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu.

2. Select Physical Resource Statistics→ONU Resource Statistics.

3. Click Custom→Create to open the Create Template dialog box. Enter the
template name, select the template type and the ONU port information entries
to be collected, and then click OK to create the statistical template.

Note:

Template type description:

u Info statistics: Collects the statistics on basic attributes of the


statistical objects.

u Quantity statistics: Collects the quantities of the types of the


statistical objects.

4. Click Statistics Range, select the statistical object and click OK.

308 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Viewing the VLAN Information

1. Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu.

2. Select Other Type Statistics→Local VLAN Statistics.

3. Click Custom→Create to open the Create Template dialog box. Enter the
template name, select the template type and the VLAN information entries to be
collected, and then click OK to create the statistical template.

4. Click Statistics Range, select the statistical object and click OK.

10.7 Importing the ODN NSM Information

Manual creation of ODN view is inefficient and may cause errors. By importing the
ODN NMS information, you can quickly establish the ODN network view. After the
information is imported, the relationship among NEs (OLT PON port, splitter and
ONU) is displayed in the topology. This improves the operation and maintenance
efficiency.

Background Information

The ODN provides optical transmission channel between the OLT and ONU.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Import ODN NSM Information from the main menu.

2. Click Open File in the lower right corner to bring up the Import Data dialog
box.

Version: B 309
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. Click Download Template to save the ODN imported information template to


the local computer and then complete the information according the actual
project requirement.

Note:

The items marked with * in the template file are required. Please enter the
items correctly; otherwise, the file may be failed to be imported.

4. Click Browse File, select the ODN information file preset and click OK to
import the data.

10.8 Querying Multiple ONUs

After importing the ONU physical ID table, you can search for the corresponding
ONU information (ONU basic information, online status and port VLAN information)
according to the ONU physical ID, and deauthorize them in a batch manner.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→Batch Query ONU to open


the Set Query Condition dialog box.

310 Version: B
10 Resource Management

2. In the Set Query Condition dialog box, click Download Template to download
the ONU physical ID template.

3. Enter the desired ONU physical ID in the ONU physical ID template table.

Note:

The ONU physical ID types and value range are described as follows:
u Physical SN: The first four digits are a ASCII character string (case-
sensitive) and the last 8 digits should range from 0 to 9 or a to f
(lower-case letters).

u MAC address: It consists of digits ranging from 0 to 9 or a to f (lower-


case letters).

4. In the Set Query Condition dialog box, click Import to import the ONU
physical ID template with physical IDs entered.

5. In the Set Query Condition dialog box, click OK. The Batch Query ONU tab
displays the query result.

Version: B 311
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

10.9 Query Board By Serial Number

You can query the name and management IP of the OLT where the card belongs
and the slot number where the card locates according to the serial number of the
card. The query range can be all the OLT devices in the network.

Prerequisite

The serial number of the card is obtained.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query Board by Serial Number from the UNM2000 main


menu.

2. In the Set Query Conditions dialog box, enter the serial number of the card
and select one or more OLT device(s).

312 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Note:

u If you select Full Field Matching, enter a complete serial number of


the card.

u If you deselect Full Field Matching, fuzzy query is supported.

3. Click OK. The Query Board by Serial Number tab displays the query result.

10.10 Querying the MDU Phone Number

With the Query MDU Phone Number function, you can navigate to the
corresponding card and port according to the telephone number of the port. At

Version: B 313
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

present, this function only supports querying the SIP voice port of the AN5006-20
and AN5006-30.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query MDU Phone Number from the UNM2000 main


menu.

2. In the Set Query Conditions dialog box, enter the Phone Number.

Note:

u If you select Full Field Matching, enter a complete phone number.

u If you deselect Full Field Matching, fuzzy query is supported.

3. Click OK. The Query MDU Phone Number tab displays the query result.

10.11 ONU RMS Error Information Query

You can filer and query the failure information of the ONU RMS and print / export the
content in the failure information table.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

314 Version: B
10 Resource Management

Procedure

1. In the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→ONU RMS Error Information


Query to open the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog box.

2. In the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog box, set Basic Information
and Advanced Information.

3. Click OK. The ONU RMS Error Information tab displays the failure details.

Other Operations

In the ONU RMS Error Information tab, right-click an entry and select Print or
Export.

10.12 Querying the ONU Network Access


Interception Logs

You can query the ONU network access interception logs through the UNM2000
and print / export the log content.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→ONU Network Intercept Log


Query to open the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box.

2. In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box, set Basic Information
and Advanced Information.

3. Click OK. The ONU Network Intercept Log Query tab displays the log
information.

Other Operations

In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query tab, right-click an entry and select Print
or Export.

Version: B 315
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

10.13 Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner

You can modify the coordinate of an NE by importing into Excel, improving the
configuration efficiency.

Prerequisite

u You have obtained the NE coordinate data.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→GIS Batch Import from the main menu.

2. Click Download Template to save the Excel template into the designated
directory on the UNM2000 client end.

3. Enter the Longitude and Latitude of the NE in the Excel and save it.

4. Click Import to bring up the Open dialog box.

5. Select the saved Excel file and click Open.

6. Click OK to import the data into the UNM2000.

10.14 Gateway Type Config

You can configure the gateway types, actual models and manufacturer names of
ONU devices of different manufacturers through the UNM2000 so that the gateway
types of the ONU devices can be identified when the resource management system
delivers the network access configuration of enterprise gateway.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→Gateway Type Config to


open the Gateway Type Config dialog box.

2. In the Gateway Type Config dialog box, click Add to open the Add dialog box.

316 Version: B
10 Resource Management

3. In the Add dialog box, enter the ONU Vendor and ONU Realno and select the
gateway type.

4. Click Yes to save the gateway type configuration into the database.

10.15 Unauthorized ONU List

You can obtain the information of all unauthorized ONUs under one or more OLT
device(s) through the UNM2000. The information of unauthorized ONUs includes
system IP address, slot number, PON port number, ONU type, physical address,
physical password, logical ID and logical password.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Unauthorized OUN List to open the Unauthorized OUN


List tab.

2. In the Unauthorized ONU List tab, select the object.

3. Click OK to query the unauthorized ONU list.

Version: B 317
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

10.16 Modify ONU Names by Importing EXCEL

You can modify the ONU name by importing into Excel, improving the configuration
efficiency.

Prerequisite

u The ONU name has been planned.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Modify ONU Names by Importing EXCEL in the main


menu.

2. Click Open File to bring up the Import Data dialog box.

3. Click Download Template to save the Excel template into the designated
directory on the UNM2000 client end.

4. Enter the planned information in the Excel and save it.

5. Click View File to open the Save dialog box.

6. Select the configured Excel file and click Save.

7. Click Confirm to import the data into the UNM2000.

318 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

When the NEs are managed by multiple UNM2000 systems and the NE
configuration is modified by one UNM2000 system, the data in other UNM2000
systems are inconsistent with NE data. To ensure consistency of the Network data
and NE data and data security, the UNM2000 provides the data synchronization and
backup functions.

Managing Data Synchronization Task

Backing Up Data

Version: B 319
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

11.1 Managing Data Synchronization Task

Data synchronization indicates synchronizing the device data with the UNM2000
data. Managing the data synchronization tasks including managing the software /
hardware version upgrade tasks, configuration upload tasks and automatic
discovery of NEs.

11.1.1 Managing Software / Hardware Version Upgrade Tasks

The software and hardware version upgrade indicates upgrading the software and
hardware versions to the UNM2000 database.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Software&Hardware Version Update Task to


view the existing software and hardware version upgrade tasks.

3. Do as follows:

4 If the existing tasks can meet the requirements, right-click a task and
select Execute Now, or select the task and click Execute Now at the
lower right corner of the tab to execute the software / hardware version
upgrade task.

4 Right-click the task to Delete, or view / modify Attribute.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information, status and failure
reason of the task.

11.1.2 Managing Configuration Upload Tasks

Due to NE maintenance or upgrade / downgrade requirements, you can back up the


NE data to the UNM2000 server, client or the third-party FTP server to avoid
damage or loss of NE data caused by upgrade / downgrade or unexpected reason.

320 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

The configuration upload tasks are used to synchronize the device configuration to
the UNM2000 database to ensure consistency of the UNM2000 data and the device
data.

11.1.2.1 Viewing Configuration Upload Tasks

By viewing the configuration upload tasks, you can confirm whether the time of
uploading the device configuration to the UNM2000 database and the execution
object meet the requirements for data synchronization.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Configuration Upload Task in the left pane to


view the existing configuration upload tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the object
information and status of the task.

Version: B 321
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

11.1.2.2 Creating a Configuration Upload Task

If the existing configuration upload task fails to meet the data synchronization
requirement, you can create new configuration upload tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click Configuration Upload Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information and Object source tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

322 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.1.2.3 Executing Configuration Upload Tasks

You can execute the configuration upload tasks to synchronize the device
configuration to the UNM2000 database so as to ensure security and correctness of
the UNM2000 data.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Configuration Upload Task in the left pane to


view the existing configuration upload tasks.

Version: B 323
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration upload
task meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the configuration
upload task.

11.2 Backing Up Data

To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up the NE data so that you can
restore the data when the severe failure occurs in the network. You can manage the
configuration backup tasks, including managing software backup task and
configuration export tasks.

11.2.1 Managing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view, create and execute the software backup tasks.

11.2.1.1 Viewing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task in the left pane to


view the existing software backup tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the object
information and status of the task.

324 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

11.2.1.2 Creating Software Backup Task

If the existing software backup task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can
create new tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click Software Backup Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.1.3 Executing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to execute software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Version: B 325
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task in the left pane to


view the existing software backup tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the software backup task
meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the software
backup task.

11.2.2 Managing Configuration Export Tasks

This section introduces how to view the data export task information, and how to
create a new task and execute operations.

11.2.2.1 Viewing Configuration Export Tasks

By viewing configuration export tasks, you can confirm whether the exported data
need to be saved externally.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

326 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

2. Select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task in the left pane to


view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the object
information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

Version: B 327
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

11.2.2.2 Creating a Configuration Export Task

If the existing configuration export task fails to meet the backup requirement, you
can create new configuration export tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click Configuration Export Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.2.3 Managing Configuration Export Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the configuration export tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

328 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task in the left pane to


view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration export
task meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the configuration.

11.2.3 Managing Card Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view, create and execute the card software backup
tasks.

11.2.3.1 Viewing the Software Batch Backup Tasks

By viewing software backup tasks, you can confirm whether it is needed to add or
delete software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the


left pane to view the existing configuration export tasks.

Version: B 329
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the object
information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click the task entry to Delete, Disable, or view or modify
Attribute.

11.2.3.2 Creating Software Backup Task

If the existing software backup task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can
create new tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the


left pane.

330 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

3. In the right pane, click Create to open the Create Board Software Batch
Backup Task dialog box.

4. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.3.3 Executing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to execute software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

Version: B 331
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the


left pane to view the existing tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration export
task meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the configuration.

11.2.4 Export Tasks of MAC Address Table

The export task of MAC address table support exporting the MAC address table of
the PON port or OLT, which can be set by the MAC address type. The following
mainly introduces how to view, create and execute the export tasks of MAC address
table.

11.2.4.1 Viewing Export Tasks of MAC Address Table

By viewing the export tasks of MAC Address Table, you can confirm whether it is
needed to add or delete the export tasks of MAC address table.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left


pane to view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the object
information and status of the task.

332 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Attribute to view the MAC
address type of the task.

11.2.4.2 Adding an Export Task of MAC Address Table

If the existing task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can create new export
tasks of MAC address table.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left


pane.

3. Click Create in the right pane to open the dialog box.

Version: B 333
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

4. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.4.3 Executing Export Tasks of MAC Address Table

The following introduces how to execute the export task of MAC address table.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You have the authority of Maintainer Group or higher authority.

334 Version: B
11 Data Synchronization and Backup

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the


Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left


pane to view the existing tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration export
task meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the configuration.

Version: B 335
12 Application Scenarios

The following introduces the common application scenarios of the UNM2000.

Alarm Management

Performance Management

Authorization and Domain Division

Guaranteeing Device Configuration

336 Version: B
12 Application Scenarios

12.1 Alarm Management

Alarm management module performs real-time monitoring on the faults and


abnormalities generated during the equipment operation and provides detailed
information and analysis of the alarm, so as to help users to isolate the faults and
handle them quickly.

Background Information

The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the current alarms and the alarm history
according to the alarm statuses.

u Current alarm: the alarm data saved in the current alarm database of the
UNM2000.

The alarm frequently generated by the same object will be displayed as one
entry in the current alarm list, and the frequency column shows the generation
times of the alarm. You can view the alarm log to query all the alarm records.

u Alarm history: the current alarms that have been confirmed and cleared will be
added into the alarm history after a preset period.

The alarm history will be saved into the alarm history database from the current
alarm database. See Setting the Definition of the Alarm History regarding how
to set the delay time for transferring the current alarms to the alarm history.

Alarm Operation Description

The UNM2000 provides abundant alarm management functions. The user can refer
to Table 12-1and choose the corresponding function to monitor and handle the
alarms.

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description

Operation Description Related Function


Set the alarm parameters,
including alarm sound,
Preset alarm For setting the alarm parameters, see Setting
alarm automatic
parameters Alarm Related Parameters.
synchronization policy and
alarm history definition.

Monitor Monitor the alarms to obtain For viewing the current alarms, see Viewing
alarms the alarm information. current alarms.

Version: B 337
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function


For viewing the alarm history, see Viewing Alarm
History.

For viewing reported alarms, see Viewing


Reported Alarms.

For viewing alarm logs, see View alarm logs..

For viewing statistics of alarm logs, see Viewing


the Alarm Log Statistics.

For viewing alarm statistics, see Viewing Alarm


Statistics.
To obtain accurate alarm
information, synchronize
the alarms to make the For synchronizing alarms, see Synchronizing
alarms displayed in the Alarms.
UNM2000 consistent with
device alarms.
Customize the alarm names For customizing alarm names, see Custom
or levels according to the Alarm Name.
maintenance requirements
for convenient management For customizing alarm levels, see Custom Alarm
and efficient alarm Level.
monitoring.

To make sure the related For managing remote alarm notification, see
staff are notified timely upon Alarm / Event Remote Notification.
occurrence of failures, you For enabling / disabling alarm alert sound, see
need to set the alarm Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm.
notification mode in
advance, including the
For setting the alarm reporting rule, see Viewing
alarm sound, alarm
Alarm Reporting Rules.
reporting rules and remote
notification rules.
For viewing the alarm details, see Viewing Alarm

Collect Collects failure information Details.

failure by viewing alarm details, For locating the alarms, see Locating Alarms.
information locating alarms and viewing For viewing related alarms, see Viewing Related
and analyze alarm-related operations Alarms.
the failure and then analyzes the For outputting alarm information, see Exporting
reason. failure reason. the Alarm Information.
View root / derivative alarms.

338 Version: B
12 Application Scenarios

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function


Eliminate the failures that
Eliminate trigger the alarms according For viewing the alarm details, see Viewing Alarm
failures to the related manuals and Details.
alarm details.
After a failure is eliminated,
the corresponding alarms
will be cleared
For clearing the alarms manually, see Clearing
automatically. If the alarms
Alarms Manually.
cannot be cleared
automatically, you can
remove them manually.

When the device is For filtering alarms, see Shielding Alarms.


Handle
maintained, tested or For managing alarm shield rules, see Viewing
alarms
commissioned, there will be Alarm Filter Rules.
a relatively great number of
reported alarms. For those
alarms that do not required
For setting project alarm shield, see Setting the
to be focused, you can set
Project Alarm Filtering.
the alarm shield to shield
the alarms matching the
conditions.
When an alarm is
Confirm
confirmed, this alarm is For confirming alarms, see Confirming Alarms.
alarms
processed.

Confirm and clear alarms at


Confirm and the same time, and save For confirming and clearing alarms, see
clear alarms the alarm to the alarm Confirming and Clearing Alarms.
database.

When the failure is For editing the alarm maintenance experience,


Record
processed, you can record see Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience.
alarm
the alarm maintenance For managing the alarm maintenance
maintenance
experience to the alarm experience, see Managing Maintenance
experience
database. Experience.

Save the alarm history to


Save alarm For managing history data saving, see
improve the NE running
history Managing the Alarm / Event Data.
efficiency.

Version: B 339
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

12.2 Performance Management

The following introduces performance management function, helping you effectively


understand the service running status in a specified period of time.

Background Information

The performance data include the current performance data, real-time performance
data and performance history data.

u Current performance: Indicates the current 15-minute performance and the


performance of the latest sixteen 15-minute time intervals. The current
performance data are not saved in the database.

u Real-time Performance: Indicates the performance data collected and


displayed in real time. The collection period can be 10 seconds or 30 seconds;
the collection interval can be 15 minutes, 30 minutes, one hour, or 24 hours.
The performance data will not saved in the database.

u Performance history: Indicates the performance data collected according to the


performance collection task and saved into the database.

Performance Operation Description

The UNM2000 provides abundant performance management functions. You can


refer to Table 12-2 and choose the corresponding performance function to
effectively monitor the running status of the NE service.

340 Version: B
12 Application Scenarios

Table 12-2 Performance Operation Description

Operation Description Related Function


As there are many
performance indexes with
great amount of
performance data, the
Enable the
UNM2000 disables the
NE
performance classification
performance -
switch of the device by
classification
default. Therefore, you need
switch
to enable the performance
classification switch before
querying the NE
performance data.

Collect performance data or


monitor performance quality For managing performance collection tasks, see
through the performance Managing Performance Collection Tasks.
collection task.
By managing performance
indicator sets, you can
For managing performance indicator set, see
quickly set the collection
Managing Performance Indicator Sets.
Manage indicator of the performance
performance collection task.
collection You can monitor the
performance data by setting
the performance threshold.
If the performance data For managing performance threshold set, see
exceeds the preset Managing Performance Threshold Sets.
threshold value, the
threshold crossing alarm will
be generated.

Version: B 341
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

Table 12-2 Performance Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function


For viewing the current performance, see
Viewing the Current Performance.

For viewing the real-time performance, see


Viewing Real-time Performance.
Monitor
Obtain performance data by For viewing the performance history, see
performance
monitoring performance. Viewing Performance History.
data
For viewing the performance history trend, see
View Performance History Trend.

For viewing the performance comparison, see


Viewing the Performance Comparison.

Save Save the performance


For managing history data saving, see
performance history data to improve the
Managing Performance Data.
history data NE running efficiency.

12.3 Authorization and Domain Division

The following takes assigning authority for users in two areas as example to
introduce how to create user accounts and assign authority.

Scenario Description

The devices in Area A and Area B are managed by UNM2000 for uniform
supervision. The device in Area A is monitored, operated and maintained by
working staff in Area A and the device in Area B is monitored, operated and
maintained by working staff in Area B. Therefore, the working staff in Area A and
Area B should be allocated with user accounts and authority respectively.

Procedure

1. Create object sets.

Create object set A and object set B according to the area division. Add the
devices of Area A and Area B to the members of object set A and object set B.

For creating object sets, see Creating an Object Set.

2. Create operation sets.

Adopt the default operation sets according to the users' responsibilities.

342 Version: B
12 Application Scenarios

4 The working staff responsible for monitoring: the application supervisor set
and the network supervisor set.

4 The working staff responsible for operation: the application operator set
and the network operator set.

4 The working staff responsible for maintenance: the application maintainer


set and the network maintainer set.

For creating operation sets, see Creating Operation Groups.

3. Create user groups.

According to the users' responsibilities, it is required to create six user groups,


as shown in Table 12-3.
Table 12-3 Creating User Groups

Manage-
User Group User Group
ment Operation Authority
Name Type
Domain
Inspector Common Object Group Application supervisor set and network
Group A user group A supervisor set

Operator Common Object Group Application operator set and network operator
Group A user group A set
Maintainer Common Object Group Application maintainer set and network
Group A user group A maintainer set
Inspector Common Object Group Application supervisor set and network
Group B user group B supervisor set

Operator Common Object Group Application operator set and network operator
Group B user group B set
Maintainer Common Object Group Application maintainer set and network
Group B user group B maintainer set

For details of creating user groups, see Creating User Groups.

4. Create users.

4 Create the user's basic information. Set the username and password. For
security, select Modify Password on Next Login or set the valid days of
the password.

4 Set the login time ranges according to the working shifts of the staff.

4 Set the users' user groups. If six user groups A, B, C, D, E, and F are to be
created, as shown in Table 12-4. After being assigned with a user group,

Version: B 343
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2.0R4SP6 Operation Guide

the user will be authorized with the management domain and operational
authority of the user group.

Table 12-4 Creating Users

User User Group

A Inspector Group A

B Operator Group A

C Maintainer Group A

D Inspector Group B

E Operator Group B

F Maintainer Group B

4 Set the access control list to restrict users' login IP address to the specified
ones.

For details of creating user groups, see Creating Users.

After completing the above configurations, provide the user accounts for the
corresponding staff.

12.4 Guaranteeing Device Configuration

To avoid that unexpected events, such as device failure, communication interruption


between the UNM2000 and the device and power failure, influence the service
recovery, the UNM2000 provides some functions for guaranteeing the device
configuration.

Backing Up Configuration

u When you need to compare whether the device configuration is the same as
that in the UNM2000 database, you can configure the synchronization
operation to view whether each configuration is the same. If not, you can
manually synchronize the device configuration to the UNM2000 database or
synchronize the configuration in the UNM2000 database to the device. For
specific operations, see Configuration Synchronization.

344 Version: B
12 Application Scenarios

u To avoid device failures, you can set the execution period as needed so that the
device configuration will be automatically uploaded to the UNM2000 database
on a regular basis, which is convenient for restoring the configuration after the
device failure is eliminated. For specific operations, see Managing
Configuration Upload Tasks.

u To avoid that the device and the UNM2000 server become faulty at the same
time, you can set the execution period so that the device configuration will be
automatically exported and saved to another FTP server on a regular basis to
ensure that the device configuration will not be lost. For specific operations, see
Managing Configuration Export Tasks.

Backing Up Software

To avoid upgrade failure of device software, you can set the execution period as
need so that the device configuration will be automatically exported and saved to
another FTP server on a regular basis, which is convenient for quickly restoring the
device software. For specific operations, see Managing Software Backup Tasks.

Version: B 345
Appendix A Abbreviations

BML Business Management Layer

BMS Business Management System

Common Object Request Broker


CORBA
Architecture
CPU Central Processing Unit

DCC Data Communication Channel


DCN Data Communication Network
DDN Digital Data Network

EML Element Management Layer

EMS Element Management System

EPON Ethernet Passive Optical Network

GPON Gigabit-Capable Passive Optical Network

FTP File Transfer Protocol


GE Gigabit Ethernet

GNE Gate Network Element


GUI Graphic User Interface

IP Internet Protocol
International Telecommunication Union-
ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Sector
NE Network Element
NEL Network Element Level
NML Network Management Layer

NMS Network Management System

OLT Optical Line Terminal

ONT Optical Network Terminal

ONU Optical Network Unit

RMS Resources Management System

SML Service Management Layer

SMS Service Management System

TCP Transfer Control Protocol


TL1 Transaction Language 1

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

346 Version: B
Appendix A Abbreviations

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UPS Uninterrupted Power System

Version: B 347
Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.

Documentation Name
Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:


1. How often do you use the documentation?
□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble
shooting □ Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
□ Yes (Please give an example)
□ No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)

□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?


□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com

You might also like